TLE9262BQX [INFINEON]

The device is designed for various CAN-LIN automot;
TLE9262BQX
型号: TLE9262BQX
厂家: Infineon    Infineon
描述:

The device is designed for various CAN-LIN automot

文件: 总175页 (文件大小:4782K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Mid-Range+ System Basis Chip Family  
Features  
Two integrated Low-Drop Voltage Regulators: Main regulator with  
5 V up to 250 mA (3.3 V variant available) and auxiliary regulator  
(5 V up to 100 mA) with off-board usage protection  
Voltage regulator (5 V or 3.3 V selectable) with external PNP  
transistor configurable for off-board usage or for load sharing  
1 high-speed CAN transceiver supporting FD communication up to  
5 Mbit/s according to ISO 11898-2:2016 & SAE J2284 (Partial  
Networking option available)  
LIN transceiver supporting LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4/SAE J2602  
4 high-side outputs 7 Ω typ., 2 HV GPIOs, 3 HV wake inputs  
Integrated fail-safe and supervision functions, e.g. fail-safe, watchdog, interrupt- and reset outputs  
16-bit SPI for configuration and diagnostics  
Potential applications  
Body Control Modules (BMC), Passive keyless entry and start modules, Gateway applications  
Heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC)  
Seat, roof, tailgate, trailer, door and other closure modules  
Light control modules  
Gear shifters and selectors  
Product validation  
Qualified for automotive applications. Product validation according to AEC-Q100.  
Description  
Body System IC with Integrated Voltage Regulators, Power Management Functions, HS-CAN Transceiver  
supporting CAN FD and LIN Transceiver.  
Featuring Multiple High-Side Switches and High-Voltage Wake Inputs.  
Type  
Package  
Marking  
TLE9262BQX  
PG-VQFN-48  
TLE9262BQX  
Datasheet  
www.infineon.com/sbc  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
1
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Table of Contents  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Potential applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Product validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
1
2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
3
Pin Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Pin Definitions and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Hints for Unused Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Hints for Alternate Pin Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
3.1  
3.2  
3.3  
3.4  
4
General Product Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Functional Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Thermal Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
4.1  
4.2  
4.3  
4.4  
5
5.1  
System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Block Description of State Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Device Configuration and SBC Init Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
SBC Init Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
SBC Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
SBC Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
SBC Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
SBC Restart Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
SBC Fail-Safe Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
SBC Development Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Wake Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Cyclic Sense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Configuration and Operation of Cyclic Sense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Cyclic Sense in Low Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Cyclic Wake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Internal Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Supervision Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
5.1.1  
5.1.1.1  
5.1.1.2  
5.1.2  
5.1.3  
5.1.4  
5.1.5  
5.1.6  
5.1.7  
5.2  
5.2.1  
5.2.1.1  
5.2.1.2  
5.2.2  
5.2.3  
5.3  
6
Voltage Regulator 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Block Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
6.1  
6.2  
6.3  
7
7.1  
7.2  
Voltage Regulator 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Block Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Datasheet  
2
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
7.2.1  
7.3  
Short to Battery Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
8
External Voltage Regulator 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Block Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
External Voltage Regulator as Independent Voltage Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
External Voltage Regulator in Load Sharing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
External Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Calculation of RSHUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Unused Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
8.1  
8.2  
8.2.1  
8.2.2  
8.3  
8.4  
8.5  
8.6  
9
9.1  
9.2  
9.2.1  
9.2.2  
9.2.3  
9.2.4  
9.2.5  
9.3  
High-Side Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Block Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Over- and Undervoltage Switch Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Overcurrent Detection and Switch Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Open Load Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
HSx Operation in Different SBC Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
PWM and Timer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
10  
10.1  
10.2  
High Speed CAN Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Block Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
CAN OFF Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
CAN Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
CAN Receive Only Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
CAN Wake Capable Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
TXD Time-out Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Bus Dominant Clamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Undervoltage Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
10.2.1  
10.2.2  
10.2.3  
10.2.4  
10.2.5  
10.2.6  
10.2.7  
10.3  
11  
11.1  
11.1.1  
11.2  
LIN Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Block Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
LIN Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
LIN OFF Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
LIN Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
LIN Receive Only Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
LIN Wake Capable Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
TXD Time-out Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Bus Dominant Clamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Undervoltage Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Slope Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Flash Programming via LIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
11.2.1  
11.2.2  
11.2.3  
11.2.4  
11.2.5  
11.2.6  
11.2.7  
11.2.8  
11.2.9  
11.3  
12  
Wake and Voltage Monitoring Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Datasheet  
3
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
12.1  
12.2  
Block Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Wake Input Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Alternate Measurement Function with WK1 and WK2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Block Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
12.2.1  
12.2.2  
12.2.2.1  
12.2.2.2  
12.3  
13  
13.1  
13.2  
Interrupt Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Block and Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
14  
Fail Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Block and Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
General Purpose I/O Functionality of FO2 and FO3 as Alternate Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
14.1  
14.1.1  
14.2  
15  
15.1  
Supervision Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Reset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Reset Output Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Soft Reset Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Watchdog Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Time-Out Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Window Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Watchdog Setting Check Sum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Watchdog during SBC Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Watchdog Start in SBC Stop Mode due to Bus Wake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
VS Power On Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Undervoltage VS and VSHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Overvoltage VSHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
VCC1 Over-/ Undervoltage and Undervoltage Prewarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
VCC1 Undervoltage and Undervoltage Prewarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
VCC1 Overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
VCC1 Short Circuit and VCC3 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
VCC2 Undervoltage and VCAN Undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Thermal Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Individual Thermal Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Temperature Prewarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
SBC Thermal Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
15.1.1  
15.1.2  
15.2  
15.2.1  
15.2.2  
15.2.3  
15.2.4  
15.2.5  
15.3  
15.4  
15.5  
15.6  
15.6.1  
15.6.2  
15.7  
15.8  
15.9  
15.9.1  
15.9.2  
15.9.3  
15.10  
16  
Serial Peripheral Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
SPI Block Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Failure Signalization in the SPI Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
SPI Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
SPI Bit Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
SPI Control Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
General Control Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
SPI Status Information Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
General Status Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
16.1  
16.2  
16.3  
16.4  
16.5  
16.5.1  
16.6  
16.6.1  
Datasheet  
4
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
16.6.2  
16.7  
Family and Product Information Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
17  
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
Application Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
ESD Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
Thermal Behavior of Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
17.1  
17.2  
17.3  
18  
19  
Package Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Datasheet  
5
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Overview  
1
Overview  
Scalable System Basis Chip Family  
Product family with various products for complete scalable application coverage  
Dedicated Data Sheets are available for the different product variants  
Complete compatibility (hardware and software) across the family  
TLE9263 with 2 LIN transceivers, 3 voltage regulators  
TLE9262 with 1 LIN transceiver, 3 voltage regulators  
TLE9261 without LIN transceivers, 3 voltage regulators  
Product variants for 5 V (TLE926xBQX) and 3.3 V (TLE926xBQXV33) output voltage for main voltage  
regulator  
CAN Partial Networking variants for 5 V (TLE926x-3BQX) and 3.3 V (TLE926x-3BQXV33) output voltage  
Device Description  
The TLE9262BQX is a monolithic integrated circuit in an exposed pad VQFN-48 (7 mm x 7 mm) power package  
with Lead Tip Inspection (LTI) feature to support Automatic Optical Inspection (AOI).  
The device is designed for various CAN-LIN automotive applications as main supply for the microcontroller  
and as interface for a LIN and CAN bus network.  
To support these applications, the System Basis Chip (SBC) provides the main functions, such as a 5 V low-  
dropout voltage regulator (LDO) for e.g. a microcontroller supply, another 5 V low-dropout voltage regulator  
with off-board protection for e.g. sensor supply, another 5 V/3.3V regulator to drive an external PNP  
transistor, which can be used as an independent supply for off-board usage or in load sharing configuration  
with the main regulator VCC1, a HS-CAN transceiver supporting CAN FD and LIN transceiver for data  
transmission, high-side switches with embedded protective functions and a 16-bit Serial Peripheral Interface  
(SPI) to control and monitor the device. Also implemented are a configurable timeout / window watchdog  
circuit with a reset feature, three Fail Outputs and an undervoltage reset feature.  
The device offers low-power modes in order to minimize current consumption on applications that are  
connected permanently to the battery. A wake-up from the low-power mode is possible via a message on the  
buses, via the bi-level sensitive monitoring/wake-up inputs as well as via cyclic wake.  
The device is designed to withstand the severe conditions of automotive applications.  
Datasheet  
6
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Overview  
Product Features  
Very low quiescent current consumption in Stop- and Sleep Mode  
Periodic Cyclic Wake in SBC Normal- and Stop Mode  
Periodic Cyclic Sense in SBC Normal-, Stop- and Sleep Mode  
Low-Drop Voltage Regulator 5 V, 250 mA  
Low-Drop Voltage Regulator 5 V, 100 mA, protected features for off-board usage  
Low-Drop Voltage Regulator, driving an external PNP transistor - 5 V in load sharing configuration or  
5 V/3.3 V in stand-alone configuration, protected features for off-board usage. Current limitation by shunt  
resistor (up to 350 mA with 470 mexternal shunt resistor) in stand-alone configuration  
High-Speed CAN Transceiver:  
fully compliant to HS-CAN standard ISO 11898-2:2016  
supporting CAN FD communication up to 5 Mbps  
LIN Transceiver LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4/SAE J2602 with configurable TXD timeout feature and LIN Flash Mode  
Fully compliant to “Hardware Requirements for LIN, CAN and FlexRay Interfaces in Automotive  
Applications” Revision 1.3, 2012-05-04  
Four High-Side Outputs 7 typ.  
Dedicated supply pin for High-Side Outputs  
Two General Purpose High-Voltage In- and Outputs (GPIOs) configurable as add. Fail Outputs, Wake Inputs,  
Low-Side switches or High-Side switches  
Three universal High-Voltage Wake Inputs for voltage level monitoring  
Alternate High-Voltage Measurement Function, e.g. for battery voltage sensing  
Configurable wake-up sources  
Reset Output  
Configurable timeout and window watchdog  
Up to three Fail Outputs (depending on configuration)  
Overtemperature and short circuit protection feature  
Wide supply input voltage and temperature range  
Software compatible to all SBC families TLE926x and TLE927x  
Green Product (RoHS compliant) & AEC Qualified  
PG-VQFN-48 leadless exposed-pad power package with Lead Tip Inspection (LTI) feature to support  
Automatic Optical Inspection (AOI)  
Datasheet  
7
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Block Diagram  
2
Block Diagram  
VSHS  
VS  
VS  
VS  
VCC1  
VCC3  
HS1  
HS2  
High Side  
HS3  
HS4  
FO1  
FO2  
VCC2  
VCC2  
FO3/TEST  
Fail Safe  
Alternative function  
for FO2/3: GPIO1/2  
SDI  
SDO  
SPI  
SBC  
STATE  
CLK  
CSN  
MACHINE  
INT  
Interrupt  
Control  
Window Watchdog  
RO  
RESET  
GENERATOR  
WK1  
WK  
VCAN  
Alternative  
function for WK 1/2:  
WAKE  
REGISTER  
Voltage measurement  
WK2  
TXDCAN  
RXDCAN  
WK  
CAN cell  
CANH  
CANL  
WK3  
WK  
VSHS  
TXDLIN1  
RXDLIN1  
LIN cell  
LIN 1  
GND  
Figure 1  
Block Diagram  
Datasheet  
8
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Pin Configuration  
3
Pin Configuration  
3.1  
Pin Assignment  
VCAN 37  
GND 38  
CANL 39  
CANH 40  
n.c. 41  
24 WK3  
23 WK2  
22 WK1  
21 FO1  
20 GND  
19 n.c.  
TLE9262  
LIN1 42  
GND 43  
N.U. 44  
n.c. 45  
18 VCC2  
17 VCC1  
16 n.c.  
PG-VQFN-48  
n.c. 46  
15 VS  
FO2 47  
14 VS  
FO3/TEST 48  
13 VSHS  
TLE9262.vsd  
Figure 2  
Pin Configuration  
Datasheet  
9
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Pin Configuration  
3.2  
Pin Definitions and Functions  
Pin  
1
Symbol  
GND  
Function  
Ground  
2
n.c.  
not connected; internally not bonded.  
VCC3REF; Collector connection for external PNP, reference input  
VCC3B; Base connection for external PNP  
VCC3SH; Emitter connection for external PNP, shunt connection  
not connected; internally not bonded.  
not connected; internally not bonded.  
High Side Output 1; typ. 7Ω  
3
VCC3REF  
VCC3B  
VCC3SH  
n.c.  
4
5
6
7
n.c.  
8
HS1  
9
HS2  
High Side Output 2; typ. 7Ω  
10  
11  
12  
13  
HS3  
High Side Output 3; typ. 7Ω  
HS4  
High Side Output 4; typ. 7Ω  
n.c  
not connected; internally not bonded.  
VSHS  
Supply Voltage for High-Side Switches and LIN and GPIO 1/2 in HS  
configuration; Connected to battery voltage with reverse protection diode and  
filter against EMC; Connect to VS if separate supply is not needed  
14  
15  
VS  
VS  
Supply Voltage for chip internal supply and voltage regulators; Connected to  
Battery Voltage with external reverse protection Diode and Filter against EMC  
Supply Voltage for chip internal supply and voltage regulators; Connected to  
Battery Voltage with external reverse protection Diode and Filter against EMC  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
n.c.  
not connected; internally not bonded.  
Voltage Regulator Output 1  
Voltage Regulator Output 2  
not connected; internally not bonded.  
Ground  
VCC1  
VCC2  
n.c.  
GND  
FO1  
WK1  
Fail Output 1  
Wake Input 1; Alternative function: HV-measurement function input pin  
(only in combination with WK2, see Chapter 12.2.2)  
23  
WK2  
Wake Input 2; Alternative function: HV-measurement function output pin  
(only in combination with WK1, see Chapter 12.2.2)  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
WK3  
N.U.  
N.U.  
CLK  
SDI  
Wake Input 3  
Not Used; Used for internal testing purpose. Do not connect, leave open  
Not Used; Used for internal testing purpose. Do not connect, leave open  
SPI Clock Input  
SPI Data Input; into SBC (=MOSI)  
SDO  
CSN  
SPI Data Output; out of SBC (=MISO)  
SPI Chip Select Not Input  
Datasheet  
10  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Pin Configuration  
Pin  
Symbol  
Function  
31  
INT  
Interrupt Output; used as wake-up flag for microcontroller in SBC Stop or  
Normal Mode and for indicating failures. Active low.  
During start-up used to set the SBC configuration. External pull-up sets config  
1/3, no external pull-up sets config 2/4.  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
RO  
Reset Output  
TXDLIN1  
RXDLIN1  
TXDCAN  
RXDCAN  
VCAN  
GND  
Transmit LIN1  
Receive LIN1  
Transmit CAN  
Receive CAN  
Supply Input; for internal HS-CAN cell  
Ground  
CANL  
CAN Low Bus Pin  
CAN High Bus Pin  
not connected; internally not bonded.  
CANH  
n.c.  
LIN1  
LIN1 Bus; Bus line for the LIN interface, according to LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4 as well  
as SAE J2602-2.  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
GND  
N.U.  
n.c.  
Ground  
Not Used; Used for internal testing purpose. Do not connect, leave open  
not connected; internally not bonded.  
not connected; internally not bonded.  
n.c.  
FO2  
Fail Output 2 - Side Indicator; Side indicators 1.25Hz 50% duty cycle output;  
Open drain. Active LOW.  
Alternative Function: GPIO1; configurable pin as WK, or LS, or HS supplied by  
VSHS (default is FO2, see also Chapter 14.1.1)  
48  
FO3/TEST  
Fail Output 3 - Pulsed Light Output; Break/rear light 100Hz 20% duty cycle  
output;  
Open drain. Active LOW  
TEST; Connect to GND to activate SBC Development Mode;  
Integrated pull-up resistor. Connect to VS with pull-up resistor or leave open for  
normal operation.  
Alternative Function: GPIO2; configurable pin as WK, or LS, or HS supplied by  
VSHS (default is FO3, see also Chapter 14.1.1)  
Cooling GND  
Tab  
Cooling Tab - Exposed Die Pad; connect the exposed pad to GND. It is  
recommended to connect the exposed pad to a heat sink.  
Note:  
All VS Pins must be connected to battery potential or insert a reverse polarity diodes where required;  
all GND pins as well as the Cooling Tab must be connected to one common GND potential;  
note that the tie bars at each package corner are connected to the cooling tab (see also Chapter 18)  
Datasheet  
11  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Pin Configuration  
3.3  
Hints for Unused Pins  
It must be ensured that the correct configurations are also selected, i.e. in case functions are not used that  
they are disabled via SPI:  
WK1/2/3: connect to GND and disable WK inputs via SPI  
HSx: leave open  
LINx, RXDLINx, TXDLINx, CANH/L, RXDCAN, TXDCAN: leave all pins open  
RO / FOx: leave open  
INT: leave open  
TEST: connect to GND during power-up to activate SBC Development Mode;  
connect to VS or leave open for normal user mode operation  
VCC2: leave open and keep disabled  
VCC3: See Chapter 8.5  
VCAN: connect to VCC1  
n.c.: not connected; internally not bonded; connect to GND  
N.U.: Not Used; Used for internal testing purposes only. Do not connect, leave open, i.e. not connected to  
any potential on the board. In case N.U. pins are connected on the board an open bridge has to be foreseen  
to avoid external disturbances. The bridge can be shorted by a 0 resistance if signal is needed.  
3.4  
Hints for Alternate Pin Functions  
In case of alternate pin functions, selectable via SPI, it must be ensured that the correct configurations are also  
selected via SPI, in case it is not done automatically. Please consult the respective chapter. In addition,  
following topics shall be considered:  
WK1..2: The pins can be either used as HV wake / voltage monitoring inputs or for a voltage measurement  
function (via bit WK_MEAS). In the second case, the WK1..2 pins shall not be used / assigned for any wake  
detection nor cyclic sense functionality, i.e. WK1 and WK2 must be disabled in the register WK_CTRL_2 and  
the level information is to be ignored in the register WK_LVL_STAT.  
FO2..3: The pins can also be configured as GPIOs in the GPIO_CTRL register. In this case, the pins shall not  
be used for any fail output functionality. The default function after Power on Reset (POR) is FOx.  
Datasheet  
12  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
General Product Characteristics  
4
General Product Characteristics  
4.1  
Absolute Maximum Ratings  
Table 1  
Absolute Maximum Ratings1)  
Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; all voltages with respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin  
(unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
Max.  
Voltages  
Supply Voltage (VS, VSHS)  
Supply Voltage (VS, VSHS)  
VSx, max  
VSx, max  
-0.3  
-0.3  
28  
40  
V
V
P_4.1.1  
P_4.1.2  
Load Dump,  
max. 400 ms  
Voltage Regulator 1  
Voltage Regulator 2  
VCC1, max  
VCC2, max  
-0.3  
-0.3  
5.5  
28  
V
V
VCC1 = 5.6V for  
max. 10s  
P_4.1.3  
P_4.1.4  
VCC2 = 40V for  
Load Dump,  
max. 400 ms;  
Voltage Regulator 3  
(VCC3REF)  
VCC3REF,max -0.3  
28  
V
V
V
VCC3REF = 40V for P_4.1.5  
Load Dump,  
max. 400 ms;  
Voltage Regulator 3 (VCC3B) VCC3B,max  
-0.3  
VS  
+ 10  
VCC3B = 40V for  
Load Dump,  
max. 400 ms;  
P_4.1.25  
P_4.1.26  
Voltage Regulator 3  
(VCC3SH)  
VCC3SH,max  
VS  
VS  
+ 0.30  
- 0.30  
Wake Inputs WK1..3  
Fail Pin FO1  
VWK, max  
-0.3  
-0.3  
-0.3  
40  
40  
V
V
V
P_4.1.6  
P_4.1.7  
P_4.1.23  
VFO1, max  
VFO2_3, max  
Fail Pins FO2, FO3/TEST  
VS  
+ 0.3  
LINx, CANH, CANL  
VBUS, max  
-27  
40  
40  
V
V
P_4.1.8  
Maximum Differential CAN VCAN_Diff, max -40  
P_4.1.27  
Bus Voltage  
Logic Input Pins (CSN, CLK, VI, max  
SDI, TXDLINx, TXDCAN)  
-0.3  
-0.3  
VCC1  
+ 0.3  
V
V
P_4.1.9  
Logic Output Pins (SDO, RO, VO, max  
VCC1  
P_4.1.10  
INT, RXDLINx, RXDCAN)  
+ 0.3  
VCAN Input Voltage  
High Side 1...4  
VVCAN, max  
VHS, max  
-0.3  
-0.3  
5.5  
V
V
P_4.1.11  
P_4.1.12  
VSHS  
+ 0.3  
Currents  
2)  
Wake input WK1  
IWK1,max  
0
500  
µA  
P_4.1.13  
Datasheet  
13  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
General Product Characteristics  
Table 1  
Absolute Maximum Ratings1) (cont’d)  
Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; all voltages with respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin  
(unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
Max.  
2)  
Wake input WK2  
IWK2,max  
-500  
0
µA  
P_4.1.14  
Temperatures  
Junction Temperature  
Storage Temperature  
ESD Susceptibility  
ESD Resistivity  
Tj  
-40  
-55  
150  
150  
°C  
°C  
P_4.1.15  
P_4.1.16  
Tstg  
VESD,11  
-2  
-2  
-8  
2
2
8
kV  
kV  
kV  
HBM3)  
HBM3)  
HBM4)3)  
P_4.1.17  
P_4.1.18  
P_4.1.19  
ESD Resistivity to GND, HSx VESD,12  
ESD Resistivity to GND,  
CANH, CANL, LINx  
VESD,13  
ESD Resistivity to GND  
VESD,21  
VESD,22  
-500  
-750  
500  
750  
V
V
CDM5)  
CDM5)  
P_4.1.20  
P_4.1.21  
ESD Resistivity Pin 1,  
12,13,24,25,36,37,48 (corner  
pins) to GND  
1) Not subject to production test, specified by design  
2) Applies only if WK1 and WK2 are configured as alternative HV-measurement function  
3) ESD susceptibility, HBM according to ANSI/ESDA/JEDEC JS-001 (1.5 kΩ, 100 pF)  
4) For ESD “GUN” Resistivity 6KV (according to IEC61000-4-2 “gun test” (150pF, 330)), will be shown in Application  
Information and test report will be provided from IBEE  
5) ESD susceptibility, Charged Device Model according to ANSI/ESDA/JEDEC JS-002  
Notes  
1. Stresses above the ones listed here may cause permanent damage to the device. Exposure to absolute  
maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.  
2. Integrated protection functions are designed to prevent IC destruction under fault conditions described in the  
data sheet. Fault conditions are considered as “outside” normal operating range. Protection functions are  
not designed for continuous repetitive operation.  
Datasheet  
14  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
General Product Characteristics  
4.2  
Functional Range  
Table 2  
Functional Range  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
Max.  
1)  
Supply Voltage  
VS,func  
VPOR  
28  
V
V
see  
P_4.2.1  
POR  
Chapter 15.10  
2)  
LIN Bus Voltage  
CAN Supply Voltage  
SPI frequency  
VS,LIN,func  
VCAN,func  
fSPI  
6
18  
5.25  
4
V
V
P_4.2.2  
P_4.2.3  
P_4.2.4  
4.75  
MHz see  
Chapter 16.7 for  
fSPI,max  
Junction Temperature  
Tj  
-40  
150  
°C  
P_4.2.5  
1) Including Power-On Reset, Over- and Undervoltage Protection  
2) Parameter Specification according to LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Note:  
Within the functional range the IC operates as described in the circuit description. The electrical  
characteristics are specified within the conditions given in the related electrical characteristics  
table.  
Device Behavior Outside of Specified Functional Range:  
28V < VS,func < 40V: Device will still be functional including the state machine; the specified electrical  
characteristics might not be ensured anymore. The regulators VCC1/2/3 are working properly, however, a  
thermal shutdown might occur due to high power dissipation. HSx switches might be turned OFF  
depending on VSHS_OV configurations. The specified SPI communication speed is ensured; the absolute  
maximum ratings are not violated, however the device is not intended for continuous operation of VS >28V.  
The device operation at high junction temperatures for long periods might reduce the operating life time;  
18V < VS,LIN <28V: The LIN transceiver is still functional. However, the communication might fail due to out-  
of-LIN-spec operation;  
V
SHS,UVD < VS,LIN < 6V: The LIN transceiver is still functional. However, the communication might fail due to  
out-of-LIN-spec operation;  
VCAN < 4.75V: The undervoltage bit VCAN_UV will be set in the SPI register BUS_STAT_1 and the transmitter  
will be disabled as long as the UV condition is present;  
5.25V < VCAN < 5.50V: CAN transceiver still functional. However, the communication might fail due to out-of-  
spec operation;  
V
POR,f < VS < 5.5V: Device will still be functional; the specified electrical characteristics might not be ensured  
anymore.  
The voltage regulators will enter the low-drop operation mode  
(applies for VCC3 only if bit VCC3_VS_ UV_OFF is set),  
A VCC1_UV reset could be triggered depending on the Vrtx settings,  
The LIN transmitter will be disabled if VSHS,UVD is reached,  
HSx switch behavior will depend on the respective configuration:  
- HS_UV_SD_EN = ‘0’ (default): HSx will be turned OFF for VSHS < VSHS_UV and will stay OFF;  
- HS_UV_SD_EN = ‘1’: HSx stays on as long as possible. An unwanted overcurrent shut down may occur.  
OC shut down bit set and the respective HSx switch will stay OFF;  
Datasheet  
15  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
General Product Characteristics  
FOx outputs will remain ON if they were enabled before VS > 5.5V,  
The specified SPI communication speed is ensured.  
4.3  
Thermal Resistance  
Table 3  
Thermal Resistance1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Values  
Typ.  
6
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
Max.  
Junction to Soldering Point RthJSP  
Junction to Ambient RthJA  
K/W Exposed Pad  
P_4.3.1  
P_4.3.2  
2)  
33  
K/W  
1) Not subject to production test, specified by design.  
2) According to Jedec JESD51-2,-5,-7 at natural convection on FR4 2s2p board for 1.5W. Board: 76.2x114.3x1.5mm3 with  
2 inner copper layers (35µm thick), with thermal via array under the exposed pad contacting the first inner copper  
layer and 300mm2 cooling area on the bottom layer (70µm).  
Datasheet  
16  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
General Product Characteristics  
4.4  
Current Consumption  
Table 4  
Current Consumption  
Current consumption values are specified at Tj = 25°C, VS = 13.5V, all outputs open (unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
Max.  
SBC Normal Mode  
Normal Mode current  
consumption  
INormal  
3.5  
44  
6.5  
mA  
µA  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V;  
Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C;  
VCC2, CAN, LIN, VCC3,  
HSx = OFF  
P_4.4.1  
SBC Stop Mode  
Stop Mode current  
consumption  
IStop_1,25  
60  
70  
1)VCC2/3, HSx = OFF; P_4.4.2  
CAN, LINx, WKx not  
wake capable;  
Watchdog = OFF;  
no load on VCC1;  
I_PEAK_TH = ‘0’  
1)2)Tj = 85°C;  
VCC2/3, HSx = OFF;  
CAN, LINx, WKx not  
wake capable;  
Stop Mode current  
consumption  
IStop_1,85  
50  
µA  
P_4.4.3  
Watchdog = OFF;  
no load on VCC1;  
I_PEAK_TH = ‘0’  
Stop Mode current  
consumption  
(high active peak threshold)  
IStop_2,25  
64  
70  
90  
µA  
µA  
1)VCC2/3, HSx = OFF; P_4.4.35  
CAN, LINx, WKx not  
wake capable;  
Watchdog = OFF;  
no load on VCC1;  
I_PEAK_TH = ‘1’  
Stop Mode current  
consumption  
(high active peak threshold)  
IStop_2,85  
100  
1)2)Tj = 85°C;  
P_4.4.36  
VCC2/3, HSx = OFF;  
CAN, LINx, WKx not  
wake capable;  
Watchdog = OFF;  
no load on VCC1;  
I_PEAK_TH = ‘1’  
SBC Sleep Mode  
Sleep Mode current  
consumption  
ISleep,25  
15  
25  
25  
35  
µA  
µA  
VCC2/3, HSx = OFF;  
CAN, LINx, WKx not  
wake capable  
2)Tj = 85°C;  
VCC2/3, HSx = OFF;  
CAN, LINx, WKx not  
wake capable  
P_4.4.5  
P_4.4.6  
Sleep Mode current  
consumption  
ISleep,85  
Datasheet  
17  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
General Product Characteristics  
Table 4  
Current Consumption (cont’d)  
Current consumption values are specified at Tj = 25°C, VS = 13.5V, all outputs open (unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
Feature Incremental Current Consumption  
Max.  
Current consumption for  
CAN module, recessive state  
ICAN,rec  
2
3
mA  
mA  
mA  
SBC Normal/Stop  
Mode; CAN Normal  
Mode; VCC1  
connected to VCAN;  
VTXDCAN = VCC1; no  
RL on CAN  
2)SBC Normal/Stop  
Mode; CAN Normal  
Mode; VCC1  
connected to VCAN;  
VTXDCAN = GND;  
no RL on CAN  
2)SBC Normal/Stop  
Mode; CAN Receive  
Only Mode; VCC1  
connected to VCAN;  
VTXDCAN = VCC1; no  
RL on CAN  
P_4.4.7  
Current consumption for  
CAN module, dominant  
state  
ICAN,dom  
3
4.5  
1.2  
P_4.4.8  
P_4.4.9  
Current consumption for  
CAN module, Receive Only  
Mode  
ICAN,RcvOnly  
0.9  
Current consumption per  
LIN module, recessive state  
ILIN,rec  
0.1  
1.0  
1
mA  
mA  
SBC Normal/Stop  
Mode; LIN Normal  
Mode; VTXDLIN =  
VCC1;  
P_4.4.10  
P_4.4.11  
P_4.4.12  
no RL on LIN  
Current consumption per  
LIN module, dominant state  
ILIN,dom  
1.5  
2)SBC Normal/Stop  
Mode; LIN Normal  
Mode; VTXDLIN =  
GND;  
no RL on LIN  
Current consumption per  
LIN module, Receive Only  
Mode  
ILIN,RcvOnly  
IWake,WKx,25  
IWake,WKx,85  
0.2  
0.2  
0.5  
0.5  
2
mA  
µA  
µA  
2)SBC Normal/Stop  
Mode; LIN Receive  
OnlyMode; VTXDLIN =  
VCC1; no RL on LIN  
3)4)5) SBC Sleep Mode; P_4.4.13  
WK1..3 wake capable  
(all WKx enabled);  
LIN, CAN = OFF  
2)3)4)5)SBC Sleep  
Mode; Tj = 85°C;  
WK1..3 wake capable;  
(all WKx enabled);  
LIN, CAN = OFF  
Current consumption for  
WK1..3 wake capability  
(all wake inputs)  
Current consumption for  
WK1..3 wake capability  
(all wake inputs)  
3
P_4.4.14  
Datasheet  
18  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
General Product Characteristics  
Table 4  
Current Consumption (cont’d)  
Current consumption values are specified at Tj = 25°C, VS = 13.5V, all outputs open (unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
0.2  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
Max.  
Current consumption per  
LIN module wake capability  
IWake,LIN,25  
2
µA  
3)SBC Sleep Mode;  
LIN wake capable;  
WK1..3, CAN = OFF  
P_4.4.15  
Current consumption per  
LIN module wake capability  
IWake,LIN,85  
0.5  
3
µA  
2)3)SBC Sleep Mode;  
Tj = 85°C;  
LIN wake capable;  
WK1..3, CAN = OFF  
3)SBC Sleep Mode;  
CAN wake capable;  
WK1..3, LIN = OFF  
2)3)SBC Sleep Mode; Tj P_4.4.18  
= 85°C;  
P_4.4.16  
P_4.4.17  
Current consumption for  
CAN wake capability  
IWake,CAN,25  
4.5  
5.5  
6
7
µA  
µA  
Current consumption for  
CAN wake capability  
IWake,CAN,85  
CAN wake capable;  
WK1..3, LIN = OFF  
VCC2 Normal Mode current INormal,VCC2  
consumption  
2.5  
25  
3.5  
35  
mA  
µA  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V;  
Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C;  
VCC2 = ON (no load)  
1)3)SBC Sleep Mode;  
VCC2 = ON (no load);  
LIN, CAN,  
P_4.4.32  
P_4.4.19  
Current consumption for  
VCC2 in SBC Sleep Mode  
ISleep,VCC2,25  
ISleep,VCC2,85  
ISleep,VCC3,25  
WK1..3 = OFF  
Current consumption for  
VCC2 in SBC Sleep Mode  
30  
40  
40  
60  
µA  
µA  
1)2)3)SBC Sleep Mode; P_4.4.20  
Tj = 85°C; VCC2 = ON  
(no load); LIN, CAN,  
WK1..3 = OFF  
Current consumption for  
VCC3 in SBC Sleep Mode in  
stand-alone configuration  
1)3)SBC Sleep Mode;  
VCC3 = ON (no load,  
stand-along config.);  
LIN, CAN,  
P_4.4.21  
WK1..3 = OFF  
Current consumption for  
VCC3 in SBC Sleep Mode in  
stand-alone configuration  
ISleep,VCC3,85  
50  
70  
µA  
µA  
1)2)3)SBC Sleep Mode; P_4.4.22  
Tj = 85°C; VCC3 = ON  
(no load, stand-along  
config.); LIN, CAN,  
WK1..3 = OFF  
Current consumption for  
HSx in SBC Stop Mode  
IStop,HSx,25  
550  
675  
3)6)SBC Stop Mode;  
Cyclic Sense & HSx=  
ON (no load);  
P_4.4.33  
LIN, CAN,  
WK1..3 = OFF  
Datasheet  
19  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
General Product Characteristics  
Table 4  
Current Consumption (cont’d)  
Current consumption values are specified at Tj = 25°C, VS = 13.5V, all outputs open (unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
575  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
Max.  
Current consumption for  
HSx in SBC Stop Mode  
IStop,HSx,85  
700  
µA  
2)3)6)SBC Stop Mode; P_4.4.34  
Tj = 85°C;  
Cyclic Sense & HSx =  
ON (no load);  
LIN, CAN,  
WK1..3 = OFF  
Current consumption for  
cyclic sense function  
IStop,CS25  
IStop,CS85  
20  
24  
28  
35  
µA  
µA  
3)7)8)SBC Stop Mode; P_4.4.23  
WD = OFF  
2)3)7)8)SBC Stop Mode; P_4.4.27  
Tj = 85°C;  
Current consumption for  
cyclic sense function  
WD = OFF  
Current consumption for  
watchdog active in Stop  
Mode  
IStop,WD25  
IStop,WD85  
IStop,FOx  
20  
28  
µA  
µA  
mA  
µA  
2)SBC Stop Mode;  
Watchdog running  
P_4.4.30  
P_4.4.31  
P_4.4.24  
P_4.4.37  
Current consumption for  
watchdog active in Stop  
Mode  
24  
35  
2)SBC Stop Mode;  
Tj = 85°C;  
Watchdog running  
2)all SBC Modes;  
Tj = 25°C; FOx = ON (no  
load);  
2)SBC Stop/Sleep  
mode; GPIO  
Current consumption for  
active fail outputs (FO1..3)  
1.0  
450  
2.0  
550  
Current consumption for  
GPIOx if configured as low-  
side/high-side for SBC Stop  
or Sleep mode  
IStop,GPIOx,LS/  
HS  
configured as LS/HS  
(no load);  
Current consumption for  
GPIOx if configured as low-  
side/high-side for SBC Stop  
or Sleep mode  
IStop,GPIOx,LS/  
450  
600  
µA  
2)SBC Stop/Sleep  
mode; Tj = -  
40…150°C;  
GPIO configured as  
LS/HS (no load);  
P_4.4.38  
HS  
1) If the load current on VCC1 will exceed the configured VCC1 active peak threshold IVCC1,Ipeak1,r or IVCC1,Ipeak2,r  
,
the current consumption will increase by typ. 2.9mA to ensure optimum dynamic load behavior. Same applies to  
VCC2. For VCC3 the current consumption will increase by typ. 1.4mA. See also Chapter 6, Chapter 7, Chapter 8.  
2) Not subject to production test, specified by design.  
3) Current consumption adders of features defined for SBC Sleep Mode also apply for SBC Stop Mode and vice versa  
(unless otherwise specified).  
4) No pull-up or pull-down configuration selected.  
5) The specified WKx current consumption adder for wake capability applies regardless how many WK inputs are  
activated.  
6) A typ. 75µA / max 125µA (Tj = 85°C) adder applies for every additionally activated HSx switch in SBC Stop Mode;  
In SBC Normal Mode every HSx switch consumes the typ. 75µA / max 125µA (Tj = 85°C) without the initial adder  
because the biasing is already enabled.  
Datasheet  
20  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
General Product Characteristics  
7) HS1 used for cyclic sense, Timer 2, 20ms period, 0.1ms on-time, no load on HS1.  
In general the current consumption adder for cyclic sense in SBC Stop Mode can be calculated with below equation:  
IStop,CS = 20µA + (550µA *tON/TPer)  
8) Also applies to Cyclic Wake  
Note:  
There is no additional current consumption contribution due to PWM generators.  
Datasheet  
21  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
5
System Features  
This chapter describes the system features and behavior of the TLE9262BQX:  
State machine  
SBC mode control  
Device configuration  
State of supply and peripherals  
System functions such as cyclic sense or cyclic wake  
Supervision and diagnosis functions  
The System Basis Chip (SBC) offers six operating modes:  
SBC Init Mode: Power-up of the device and after a soft reset,  
SBC Normal Mode: The main operating mode of the device,  
SBC Stop Mode: The first-level power saving mode with the main voltage regulator VCC1 enabled,  
SBC Sleep Mode: The second-level power saving mode with VCC1 disabled,  
SBC Restart Mode: An intermediate mode after a wake event from SBC Sleep or Fail-Safe Mode or after a  
failure (e.g. WD failure, VCC1 undervoltage reset) to bring the microcontroller into a defined state via a  
reset. Once the failure condition is not present anymore the device will automatically change to SBC  
Normal Mode after a delay time (tRD1).  
SBC Fail-Safe Mode: A safe-state mode after critical failures (e.g. WD failure, VCC1 undervoltage reset) to  
bring the system into a safe state and to ensure a proper restart of the system. VCC1 is disabled. It is a  
permanent state until either a wake event (via CAN, LINx or WKx) occurs or the overtemperature condition  
is not present anymore.  
A special mode, called SBC Development Mode, is available during software development or debugging of the  
system. All above mentioned operating modes can be accessed in this mode. However, the watchdog counter  
is stopped and does not need to be triggered. This mode can be accessed by setting the TEST pin to GND  
during SBC Init Mode.  
The device can be configured via hardware (external component) to determine the device behavior after a  
watchdog trigger failure. See Chapter 5.1.1 for further information.  
The System Basis Chip is controlled via a 16-bit SPI interface. A detailed description can be found in  
Chapter 16.The configuration as well as the diagnosis is handled via the SPI. The SPI mapping of the  
TLE9262BQX is compatible to other devices of the TLE926x and TLE927x families.  
Datasheet  
22  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
5.1  
Block Description of State Machine  
The different SBC Modes are selected via SPI by setting the respective SBC MODE bits in the register  
M_S_CTRL. The SBC MODE bits are cleared when going through SBC Restart Mode and thus always show the  
current SBC mode.  
First battery connection  
SBC Soft Reset  
SBC Init Mode  
*
Config.: settings can be  
(Long open window)  
changed in this SBC mode;  
VCC1  
ON  
VCC2  
OFF  
CAN(3)  
OFF  
VCC3  
OFF Config.  
LINx(3)  
OFF  
WD Cyc. Sense  
OFF  
Fixed: settings stay as defined  
in SBC Normal Mode  
Any SPI  
command  
Cyc. Wake  
OFF  
FOx  
inact.  
HSx  
OFF  
* The SBC Development Mode  
is a super set of state machine  
where the WD timer is stopped  
and CAN/LINx behavior differs  
in SBC Init Mode. Otherwise,  
there are no differences in  
behavior.  
SBC Normal Mode  
Cyc. Sense  
config.  
VCC1  
ON  
VCC2  
VCC3  
WD  
WD trigger  
config.  
config. config.  
CAN(3)  
config.  
Cyc.Wake  
config.  
FOx  
act/inact  
LINx(3)  
config. config.  
HSx  
.
.
Reset is released  
WD starts with long open window  
Automatic  
SPI cmd  
SPI cmd  
SPI cmd  
SBC Stop Mode  
SBC Sleep Mode  
VCC3(2)  
VCC1  
ON  
VCC2  
fixed  
VCC3  
fixed  
WD  
fixed  
Cyc. Sense  
fixed  
VCC1  
OFF  
VCC2  
WD  
OFF.  
Cyc. Sense  
fixed  
Fixed /  
fixed  
OFF  
VCC1 over voltage  
Config 1/3 (if VCC_OV_RST set)  
CAN(6)  
FOx  
fixed  
CAN  
fixed  
LINx  
fixed  
HSx  
fixed  
LINx  
Cyc. Wake  
fixed  
FOx  
fixed  
HSx  
fixed  
Cyc.Wake  
OFF  
Wake  
Wake  
capable/off  
capable/off  
Wake up event  
SBC Restart Mode  
(RO pin is asserted)  
Watchdog Failure:  
Config 1/3 & 1st WD failure  
in Config4  
VCC3(2)  
After 4x consecutive VCC1  
under voltage events  
(if VS > VS_UV)  
VCC1  
ON/  
ramping  
VCC2  
OFF  
WD  
OFF  
Cyc.Sense  
OFF  
VCC1 over voltage  
Config 2/4 (if VCC_OV_RST set)  
fixed/  
ramping  
FOx(5)  
active/  
fixed  
CAN (4)  
woken /  
OFF  
LINx (4)  
woken /  
OFF  
HSx  
OFF  
Cyc. Wake  
OFF  
VCC1  
Undervoltage  
SBC Fail-Safe Mode (1)  
TSD2 event,  
1st Watchdog Failure Config 2,  
2nd Watchdog Failure, Config 4  
Cyc.Sense  
OFF  
VCC1  
OFF  
VCC2  
OFF  
VCC3  
OFF  
WD  
OFF  
CAN, LINx, WKx wake-up event  
OR  
Release of over temperature  
TSD2 after tTSD2  
(1) After Fail-Safe Mode entry, the device will stay for at least  
typ. 1s in this mode (with RO low) after a TSD2 event and  
min. typ. 100ms after other Fail-Safe Events. Only then the device  
can leave the mode via a wake-up event. Wake events are stored  
during this time.  
FOx(5)  
active  
HSx Cyc. Wake  
OFF  
CAN  
Wake  
capable  
LINx  
Wake  
capable  
VCC1 Short to GND  
OFF  
(2) According to VCC3 configuration.  
(3) For SBC Development Mode CAN/LINx/VCC2 are ON in SBC Init  
Mode and stay ON when going from there to SBC Normal Mode.  
(4) See chapter CAN & LIN for detailed behavior in SBC Restart Mode.  
(5) See Chapter 5.1.5 and 14.1 for detailed FOx behavior.  
(6) Must be set to CAN wake capable / CAN OFF mode before  
entering SBC Sleep Mode.  
Figure 3  
State Diagram showing the SBC Operating Modes  
Datasheet  
23  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
5.1.1  
Device Configuration and SBC Init Mode  
The SBC starts up in SBC Init Mode after crossing the power-on reset VPOR,r threshold (see also Chapter 15.3)  
and the watchdog will start with a long open window (tLW).  
During this power-on phase following configurations are stored in the device:  
The device behavior regarding a watchdog trigger failure and a VCC1 overvoltage condition is determined  
by the external circuitry on the INT pin (see below)  
The selection of the normal device operation or the SBC Development Mode (watchdog disabled for  
debugging purposes) will be set depending on the voltage level of the FO3/TEST pin (see also  
Chapter 5.1.7).  
5.1.1.1 Device Configuration  
The configuration selection is intended to select the SBC behavior regarding a watchdog trigger failure.  
Depending on the requirements of the application, the VCC1 output shall be switched OFF and the device shall  
go to SBC Fail-Safe Mode in case of a watchdog failure (1 or 2 fails). To set this configuration (Config 2/4), the  
INT pin does not need an external pull-up resistor. In case VCC1 should not be switched OFF (Config 1/3), the  
INT pin needs to have an external pull-up resistor connected to VCC1 (see application diagram in  
Chapter 17.1).  
Figure 5 shows the timing diagram of the hardware configuration selection. The hardware configuration is  
defined during SBC Init Mode. The INT pin is internally pulled LOW with a weak pull-down resistor during the  
reset delay time tRD1, i.e.after VCC1 crosses the reset threshold VRT1 and before the RO pin goes HIGH. The INT  
pin is monitored during this time (with a continuos filter time of tCFG_F) and the configuration (depending on  
the voltage level at INT) is stored at the rising edge of RO.  
Note:  
If the POR bit is not cleared then the internal pull-down resistor will be reactivated every time RO is  
pulled LOW the configuration will be updated at the rising edge of RO. Therefore it is recommended  
to clear the POR bit right after initialization. In case there is no stable signal at INT, then the default  
value ‘0’ will taken as the config select value = SBC Fail-Safe Mode.  
Datasheet  
24  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
VS  
VPOR,r  
t
t
VCC1  
VRT1,r  
RO  
tCFG_F  
Continuous Filtering with  
t
tRD1  
Configuration selection monitoring period  
Figure 4  
Hardware Configuration Selection Timing Diagram  
There are four different device configurations (Table 5) available defining the watchdog failure and the VCC1  
overvoltage behavior. The configurations can be selected via the external connection on the INT pin and the  
SPI bit CFG in the HW_CTRL register (see also Chapter 16.4):  
CFGP = ‘1’: Config 1 and Config 3:  
A watchdog trigger failure leads to SBC Restart Mode and depending on CFG the Fail Outputs (FOx) are  
activated after the 1st (Config 1) or 2nd (Config 3) watchdog trigger failure;  
A VCC1 overvoltage detection will lead to SBC Restart Mode if VCC1_OV_RST is set.  
VCC1_ OV will be set and the Fail Outputs are activated;  
CFGP = ‘0’: Config 2 and Config 4:  
A watchdog trigger failure leads to SBC Fail-Safe Mode and depending on CFG the Fail Outputs (FOx)  
are activated after the 1st (Config 2) or 2nd (Config 4) watchdog trigger failure. The first watchdog  
trigger failure in Config 4 will lead to SBC Restart Mode;  
A VCC1 overvoltage detection will lead to SBC Fail-Safe Mode if VCC1_OV_RST is set.  
VCC1_ OV will be set and the Fail Outputs are activated;  
The respective device configuration can be identified by reading the SPI bit CFG in the HW_CTRL register and  
the CFGP bit in the WK_LVL_STAT register.  
Table 5 shows the configurations and the device behavior in case of a watchdog trigger failure:  
Datasheet  
25  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
Table 5  
Watchdog Trigger Failure Configuration  
Config INT Pin (CFGP) SPI Bit CFG RO activation  
FOx activation  
SBC Mode Entry  
1
2
External pull-up  
No ext. pull-up  
1
1
each watchdog failure after 1st WD failure SBC Restart Mode  
each watchdog failure after 1st WD failure SBC Fail-Safe Mode  
after 1st WD failure  
3
4
External pull-up  
No ext. pull-up  
0
0
each watchdog failure after 2nd WD failure SBC Restart Mode  
each watchdog failure after 2nd WD failure SBC restart mode after  
1st WD failure.  
SBC Fail-Safe Mode  
after 2nd WD failure  
Table 6 shows the configurations and the device behavior in case of a VCC1 overvoltage detection when  
VCC1_OV_RST is set:  
Table 6  
Device Behavior in Case of VCC1 Overvoltage Detection  
Config INT Pin (CFGP) CFG Bit VCC1_O Event  
V_RST  
VCC1_ FOx Activation  
OV  
SBC Mode Entry  
1-4  
1
any value  
x
0
1
1 x VCC1 OV  
1 x VCC1 OV  
1
1
no FOx activation unchanged  
External pull-  
up  
1
after 1st VCC1 OV SBC Restart Mode  
2
3
No ext. pull-up 1  
1
1
1 x VCC1 OV  
1 x VCC1 OV  
1
1
after 1st VCC1 OV SBC Fail-Safe Mode  
after 1st VCC1 OV SBC Restart Mode  
External pull-  
up  
0
4
No ext. pull-up 0  
1
1 x VCC1 OV  
1
after 1st VCC1 OV SBC Fail-Safe Mode  
The respective configuration will be stored for all conditions and can only be changed by powering down the  
device (VS < VPOR,f).  
Datasheet  
26  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
5.1.1.2 SBC Init Mode  
In SBC Init Mode, the device waits for the microcontroller to finish its startup and initialization sequence. In  
the SBC Init Mode any valid SPI command will bring the SBC to SBC Normal Mode. During the long open  
window the watchdog has to be triggered. Thereby the watchdog will be automatically configured.  
A missing watchdog trigger during the long open window will cause a watchdog failure and the device will  
enter SBC Restart Mode.  
Wake events are ignored during SBC Init Mode and will therefore be lost.  
Notes  
1. Any SPI command will bring the SBC to SBC Normal Mode even if it is a illegal SPI command (see  
Chapter 16.2).  
2. For a safe start-up, it is recommended to use the first SPI command to trigger and to configure the watchdog  
(see Chapter 15.2).  
3. At power up no VCC1_UV will be issued nor will FOx be triggered as long as VCC1 is below the VRT,x threshold  
and if VS is below the VCC1 short circuit detection threshold VS,UV. The RO pin will be kept low as long as VCC1  
is below the selected VRT,x threshold.  
Datasheet  
27  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
5.1.2  
SBC Normal Mode  
The SBC Normal Mode is the standard operating mode for the SBC. All configurations have to be done in SBC  
Normal Mode before entering a low-power mode (see also Chapter 5.1.6 for the device configuration defining  
the Fail-Safe Mode behavior). A wake-up event on CAN, LINx and WKx will create an interrupt on pin INT -  
however, no change of the SBC mode will occur. The configuration options are listed below:  
VCC1 is active  
VCC2 can be switched ON or OFF (default = OFF)  
VCC3 is configurable (OFF coming from SBC Init Mode; as previously programmed coming from SBC Restart  
Mode)  
CAN is configurable (OFF coming from SBC Init Mode; OFF or wake capable coming from SBC Restart Mode,  
see also Chapter 5.1.5)  
LIN is configurable (OFF coming from SBC Init Mode; OFF or wake capable coming from SBC Restart Mode,  
see also Chapter 5.1.5)  
HS Outputs can be switched ON or OFF (default = OFF) or can be controlled by PWM; HS Outputs are OFF  
coming from SBC Restart Mode  
Wake pins show the input level and can be selected to be wake capable (interrupt)  
Cyclic sense can be configured with HS1...4 and Timer1 or Timer 2  
Cyclic wake can be configured with Timer1 or Timer2  
Watchdog is configurable  
All FOx outputs are OFF by default. Coming from SBC Restart Mode FOx can be active (due to a failure event,  
e.g. watchdog trigger failure, VCC1 short circuit, etc.) or inactive (no failure occurred)  
In SBC Normal Mode, there is the possibility of testing the FO outputs, i.e. to verify if setting the FO pin to low  
will create the intended behavior within the system. The FO output can be enabled and then disabled again  
by the microcontroller by setting the FO_ON SPI bit. This feature is only intended for testing purposes.  
Datasheet  
28  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
5.1.3  
SBC Stop Mode  
The SBC Stop Mode is the first level technique to reduce the overall current consumption by setting the  
voltage regulators VCC1, VCC2 and VCC3 into a low-power mode. In this mode VCC1 is still active and supplying  
the microcontroller, which can enter a power down mode. The VCC2 supply, CAN & LIN mode as well as the  
HSx outputs can be configured to stay enabled. All kind of settings have to be done before entering SBC Stop  
Mode. In SBC Stop Mode any kind of SPI WRITE commands are ignored and the SPI_FAIL bit is set, except for  
changing to SBC Normal Mode, triggering a SBC Soft Reset, refreshing the watchdog as well as for reading and  
clearing the SPI status registers. A wake-up event on CAN, LINx and WKx will create an interrupt on pin INT -  
however, no change of the SBC mode will occur. The configuration options are listed below:  
VCC1 is ON  
VCC2 is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode  
VCC3 is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode  
CAN mode is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode  
LIN mode is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode  
WK pins are fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode  
HS Outputs are fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode  
Cyclic sense is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode  
Cyclic wake is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode  
Watchdog is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode  
SBC Soft Reset can be triggered  
FOx outputs are fixed, i.e. the state from SBC Normal Mode is maintained  
An interrupt is triggered on the pin INT when SBC Stop Mode is entered and not all wake source signalization  
flags from WK_STAT_1 and WK_STAT_2 were cleared.  
Notes  
1. If switches are enabled during SBC Stop Mode, e.g. HSx on with or without PWM, then the SBC current  
consumption will increase (see Chapter 4.4).  
2. It is not possible to switch directly from SBC Stop Mode to SBC Sleep Mode. Doing so will also set the SPI_FAIL  
flag and will bring the SBC into Restart Mode.  
3. When WK1 and WK2 are configured for the alternate measurement function (WK_MEAS = 1) then the wake  
inputs cannot be selected as wake input sources.  
Datasheet  
29  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
5.1.4  
SBC Sleep Mode  
The SBC Sleep Mode is the second level technique to reduce the overall current consumption to a minimum  
needed to react on wake-up events or for the SBC to perform autonomous actions (e.g. cyclic sense). In this  
mode, VCC1 is OFF and not supplying the microcontroller anymore.The VCC2 supply as well as the HSx outputs  
can be configured to stay enabled. The settings have to be done before entering SBC Sleep Mode. A wake-up  
event on CAN, LINx or WKx will bring the device via SBC Restart Mode into SBC Normal Mode again and signal  
the wake source. The configuration options are listed below:  
VCC1 is OFF  
VCC2 is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode  
VCC3 is fixed or OFF as configured in SBC Normal Mode  
CAN mode changes automatically from ON or Receive Only Mode to wake capable mode or can be selected  
to be OFF  
CAN must be set to CAN wake capable / CAN off mode before entering SBC Sleep Mode  
LIN mode changes automatically from ON or Receive Only Mode to wake capable mode or can be selected  
to be OFF  
WK pins are fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode  
HS Outputs are fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode  
Cyclic sense is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode  
Cyclic wake is not available  
Watchdog is OFF  
FOx outputs are fixed, i.e. the state from SBC Normal Mode is maintained  
As VCC1 is OFF during SBC Sleep Mode, no SPI communication is possible;  
The Sleep Mode entry is signalled in the SPI register DEV_STAT with the bit DEV_STAT  
It is not possible to switch all wake sources off in SBC Sleep Mode. Doing so will set the SPI_FAIL flag and will  
bring the SBC into SBC Restart Mode.  
In order to enter SBC Sleep Mode successfully, all wake source signalization flags from WK_STAT_1 and  
WK_STAT_2 need to be cleared. A failure to do so will result in an immediate wake-up from SBC Sleep Mode  
by going via SBC Restart to Normal Mode.  
All settings must be done before entering SBC Sleep Mode.  
Notes  
1. If switches are enabled during SBC Sleep mode, e.g. HSx on with or without PWM, then the SBC current  
consumption will increase (see Chapter 4.4).  
2. Cyclic Sense function will not work properly anymore in case of an overcurrent, overtemperature, under- or  
overvoltage (in case function is selected) event because the respective HS switch will be disabled.  
3. When WK1 and WK2 are configured for the alternate measurement function (WK_MEAS = 1) then the wake  
inputs cannot be selected as wake input sources.  
Datasheet  
30  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
5.1.5  
SBC Restart Mode  
There are multiple reasons to enter the SBC Restart Mode. The purpose of the SBC Restart Mode is to reset the  
microcontroller:  
in case of undervoltage on VCC1 in SBC Normal and in SBC Stop Mode,  
in case of overvoltage on VCC1 if the bit VCC1_OV_RST is set and if CFGP = ‘1’,  
due to 1st incorrect Watchdog triggering (only if Config1, Config3 or Config 4 is selected, otherwise SBC  
Fail-Safe Mode is immediately entered),  
In case of a wake event from SBC Sleep or SBC Fail-Safe Mode or a release of overtemperature shutdown  
(TSD2) out of SBC Fail-Safe Mode this transition is used to ramp up VCC1 after a wake in a defined way.  
From SBC Restart Mode, the SBC goes automatically to SBC Normal Mode, i.e the mode is left automatically  
by the SBC without any microcontroller influence. The SBC MODE bits are cleared. As shown in Figure 47 the  
Reset Output (RO) is pulled low when entering Restart Mode and is released at the transition to Normal Mode  
after the reset delay time (tRD1). The watchdog timer will start with a long open window starting from the  
moment of the rising edge of RO and the watchdog period setting in the register WD_CTRL will be changed to  
the respective default value ‘100’.  
Leaving the SBC Restart Mode will not result in changing / deactivating the Fail outputs.  
The behavior of the blocks is listed below:  
All FOx outputs are activated in case of a 1st watchdog trigger failure (if Config1 or Config2 is selected) or  
in case of VCC1 overvoltage detection (if VCC1_OV_RST is set)  
VCC1 is ON or ramping up  
VCC2 will be disabled if it was activated before  
VCC3 is fixed or ramping as configured in SBC Normal Mode  
CAN is “woken” due to a wake event or OFF depending on previous SBC and transceiver mode (see also  
Chapter 10). It is wake capable when it was in CAN Normal-, Receive Only or wake capable mode before  
SBC Restart Mode  
LIN is “woken” or OFF depending on previous SBC and transceiver mode (see also Chapter 11). It is wake  
capable when it was in LIN Normal-, Receive Only or wake capable mode before SBC Restart Mode.  
HS Outputs will be disabled if they were activated before  
RO is pulled low during SBC Restart Mode  
SPI communication is ignored by the SBC, i.e. it is not interpreted  
The Restart Mode entry is signalled in the SPI register DEV_STAT with the bits DEV_STAT  
Table 7  
Reasons for Restart - State of SPI Status Bits after Return to Normal Mode  
Prev. SBC Mode  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Stop  
Event  
DEV_STAT WD_FAIL VCC1_UV VCC1_OV VCC1_SC  
1x Watchdog Failure  
2x Watchdog Failure  
01  
01  
01  
10  
xx  
xx  
01  
10  
xx  
xx  
x
x
1
x
x
x
1
x
x
x
x
1
x
x
x
1
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
VCC1 undervoltage reset 01  
VCC1 overvoltage reset 01  
1x Watchdog Failure  
2x Watchdog Failure  
01  
01  
Stop  
Stop  
VCC1 undervoltage reset 01  
VCC1 overvoltage reset 01  
Stop  
Datasheet  
31  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
Table 7  
Reasons for Restart - State of SPI Status Bits after Return to Normal Mode (cont’d)  
Prev. SBC Mode  
Sleep  
Event  
DEV_STAT WD_FAIL VCC1_UV VCC1_OV VCC1_SC  
Wake-up event  
Wake-up event  
10  
01  
xx  
x
x
x
Fail-Safe  
see “Reasons for Fail Safe, Table 8”  
Notes  
1. An overvoltage event on VCC1 will only lead to SBC Restart Mode if the bit VCC1_OV_RST is set and if CFGP =  
‘1’ (Config 1/3).  
2. The content of the WD_FAIL bits will depend on the device configuration, e.g. 1 or 2 watchdog failures.  
5.1.6  
SBC Fail-Safe Mode  
The purpose of this mode is to bring the system in a safe status after a failure condition by turning off the VCC1  
supply and powering off the microcontroller. After a wake event the system is then able to restart again.  
The Fail-Safe Mode is automatically reached for following events:  
after an SBC thermal shutdown (TSD2) (see also Chapter 15.9.3),  
in case of overvoltage on VCC1 if the bit VCC1_OV_RST is set and if CFGP = ‘0’,  
after a 1st incorrect watchdog trigger in Config2 (CFG = 1) and after a 2nd incorrect watchdog trigger in  
Config4 (CFG = 0) (see also Chapter 5.1.1),  
if VCC1 is shorted to GND (see also Chapter 15.7),  
After 4 consecutive VCC1 undervoltage events (only if VS > VS,UV, see Chapter 15.6).  
In this case, the default wake sources (CAN, LINx, WK1...3, see also registers WK_CTRL_2, BUS_CTRL_1) are  
activated, the wake events are cleared in the register WK_STAT_1, and all output drivers and all voltage  
regulators are switched off. When WK1 and WK2 are configured for the alternate measurement function  
(WK_MEAS = 1) then WK1 and WK2 will stay configured for the measurement function when SBC Fail-Safe  
Mode is entered, i.e. they will not be activated as wake sources.  
The SBC Fail-Safe Mode will be maintained until a wake event on the default wake sources occurs. To avoid  
any fast toggling behavior a filter time of typ. 100ms (tFS,min) is implemented. Wake events during this time will  
be stored and will automatically lead to entering SBC Restart Mode after the filter time.  
In case of an VCC1 overtemperature shutdown (TSD2) the SBC Restart Mode will be reached automatically  
after a filter time of typ. 1s (tTSD2) without the need of a wake event.  
Leaving the SBC Fail-Safe Mode will not result in deactivation of the Fail Output pins.  
The following functions are influenced during SBC Fail-Safe Mode:  
All FOx outputs are activated (see also Chapter 14)  
VCC1 is OFF  
VCC2 is OFF  
VCC3 is OFF  
CAN is wake capable  
LINx is wake capable  
HS Outputs are OFF  
WK pins are wake capable through static sense (with default 16µs filter time)  
Cyclic sense and Cyclic wake is disabled  
SPI communication is disabled because VCC1 is OFF  
Datasheet  
32  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
The Fail-Safe Mode activation is signalled in the SPI register DEV_STAT with the bits FAILURE and  
DEV_STAT  
Datasheet  
33  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
Table 8  
Reasons for Fail-Safe - State of SPI Status Bits after Return to Normal Mode  
Prev. SBC Failure Event  
Mode  
DEV_  
STAT  
TSD2  
WD_  
FAIL  
VCC1_  
UV  
VCC1_  
UV_FS  
VCC1_  
OV  
VCC1_  
SC  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Stop  
1 x Watchdog Failure 01  
2 x Watchdog Failure 01  
x
x
1
x
x
x
x
x
1
x
x
x
01  
10  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
01  
10  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
x
1
1
x
x
x
x
1
1
x
x
x
x
x
1
x
x
x
x
x
1
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
x
x
x
x
x
1
x
x
x
1
x
x
x
x
x
1
x
x
TSD2  
01  
01  
01  
01  
VCC1 short to GND  
4x VCC1 UV  
VCC1 overvoltage  
1 x Watchdog Failure 01  
2 x Watchdog Failure 01  
Stop  
Stop  
TSD2  
01  
01  
01  
01  
Stop  
VCC1 short to GND  
4x VCC1 UV  
Stop  
Stop  
VCC1 overvoltage  
Notes  
1. An overvoltage event on VCC1 will only lead to SBC Fail-Safe Mode if the bit VCC1_OV_RST is set and if CFGP =  
‘0’ (Config 2/4).  
2. The content of the WD_FAIL bits will depend on the device configuration, e.g. 1 or 2 watchdog failures.  
3. See Chapter 15.6.1 for detailed description of the 4x VCC1 undervoltage behavior.  
5.1.7  
SBC Development Mode  
The SBC Development Mode is used during the development phase of the module. It is especially useful for  
software development.  
Compared to the default SBC user mode operation, this mode is a super set of the state machine. The device  
will start also in SBC Init Mode and it is possible to use all the SBC Modes and functions with following  
differences:  
Watchdog is stopped and does not need to be triggered. Therefore no reset is triggered due to watchdog  
failure  
SBC Fail-Safe and SBC Restart Mode are not reached due to watchdog failure but the other reasons to enter  
these modes are still valid  
LINx, CAN and VCC2 default value in SBC INIT MODE and entering SBC Normal Mode from SBC Init Mode is  
ON instead of OFF  
The SBC Development Mode is reached automatically if the FO3/TEST pin is set and kept LOW during SBC Init  
Mode. The voltage level monitoring is started as soon as VS > VPOR,f. The Development Mode is configured and  
maintained if SBC Init Mode is left by sending any SPI command while FO3/TEST is LOW. In case the FO3/TEST  
level will be HIGH for longer than tTEST during the monitoring period then the SBC Development Mode is not  
reached .  
The SBC will remain in this mode for all conditions and can only be left by powering down the device  
(VS < VPOR,f).  
Datasheet  
34  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
Note:  
The absolute maximum ratings of the pin FO3/TEST must be observed. To increase the robustness of  
this pin during debugging or programming a series resistor between FO3/TEST and the connector  
can be added (see Figure 61).  
5.2  
Wake Features  
Following wake sources are implemented in the device:  
Static Sense: WK inputs are permanently active (see Chapter 12)  
Cyclic Sense: WK inputs only active during on-time of cyclic sense period (see below)  
Cyclic Wake: internal wake source controlled via internal timer (see below)  
CAN wake: Wake-up via CAN message (see Chapter 10)  
LIN wake: Wake-up via LIN message (see Chapter 11)  
5.2.1  
Cyclic Sense  
The cyclic sense feature is intended to reduce the quiescent current of the device and the application.  
In the cyclic sense configuration, one or more high-side drivers are switched on periodically controlled by  
TIMER1_CTRL and TIMER2_CTRL. The respective high-side drivers supply external circuitries e.g. switches  
and/or resistor arrays, which are connected to one or more wake inputs (see Figure 5). Any edge change of the  
WKx input signal during the on-time of the cyclic sense period causes a wake. Depending on the SBC mode,  
either the INT is pulled low (SBC Normal Mode and Stop Mode) or the SBC is woken enabling the VCC1 (after  
SBC Sleep and SBC Fail-Safe Mode).  
High Side  
1-4  
HS x  
HS_CTRL  
Signals  
GND  
Switching  
Circuitry  
TIMER_CTRL  
Period / On-Time  
INT  
SBC  
to uC  
STATE  
MACHINE  
WK x  
WK  
1-3  
WK_FLT_CTRL  
Figure 5  
Cyclic Sense Working Principle  
Datasheet  
35  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
5.2.1.1 Configuration and Operation of Cyclic Sense  
The correct sequence to configure the cyclic sense is shown in Figure 6. All the configurations have to be  
performed before the on-time is set in the TIMERx_CTRL registers. The settings “OFF / LOW” and “OFF / HIGH”  
define the voltage level of the respective HS driver before the start of the cyclic sense. The intention of this  
selection is to avoid an unintentional wake due to a voltage level change at the start of the cyclic sense.  
Cyclic Sense (=TimerX) will start as soon as the respective on-time has been selected independently from the  
assignment of the HS and filter configuration. The selection of the respective timer (Config C/D see  
Chapter 12.2.1) must therefore be done before starting the timer. The correct configuration sequence is as  
follows:  
Configure the initial level  
Mapping of a Timer to the respective HSx outputs  
Configuring the respective filter timing and WK pins  
Configuring the timer period and on-time  
Cyclic Sense Configuration  
Assign TIMERx_ON to OFF/Low or  
Timer1, Timer2  
Timer1, Timer2  
OFF/High in TIMERx_CTRL  
Assign Timer to selected HS switch  
in HS_CTRL_X  
Enable WKx as wake source with  
configured Timer in WK_FLT_CTRL  
WK1, WK2, WK3 with  
above selected timer  
Select WKx pull-up / pull-down  
configuration in WK_PUPD_CTRL  
No pull-up/-down, pull-down or pull-up  
selected, automatic switching  
Select Timer Period and desired  
Period: 10, 20, 50, 100, 200ms, 1s, 2s  
On-Time: 0.1, 0.3, 1.0, 10, 20ms  
On-Time in TIMERx_CTRL  
Changing the settings can be done on the  
fly, changes become effective at the next  
on-time or period  
Cyclic Sense starts / ends by  
setting / clearing On-time  
Figure 6  
Cyclic Sense: Configuration and Sequence  
Note:  
All configurations of period and on-time can be selected. However, recommended on-times for cyclic  
sense are 0.1ms, 0.3ms and 1ms. The SPI_FAIL will be set if the on-time is longer than the period.  
Datasheet  
36  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
The first sample of the WK input value (HIGH or LOW) is taken as the reference for the next cycle. A change of  
the WK input value between the first and second cycle recognized during the on-time of the second cycle will  
cause a wake from SBC Sleep Mode or an interrupt during SBC Normal or SBC Stop Mode.  
A filter time of 16µs is implemented to avoid a parasitic wake-up due to transients or EMC disturbances. The  
filter time tFWK1 is triggered right at the end of the selected on-time and a wake signal is recognized if:  
the input level will not cross the switching threshold level of typ. 3V during the selected filter time (i.e. if the  
signal will keep the HIGH or LOW level) and  
there was an input level change between the current and previous cycle  
A wake event due to cyclic sense will set the respective bit WK1_WU, WK2_WU, or WK3_WU.  
During Cyclic Sense, WK_LVL_STAT is updated only with the sampled voltage levels of the WKx pins in SBC  
Normal or SBC Stop Mode.  
The functionality of the sampling and different scenarios are depicted in Figure 7 to Figure 9. The behavior in  
SBC Stop and SBC Sleep Mode is identical except that in Stop Mode INT will be triggered to signal a change of  
WK input levels and in SBC Sleep Mode, VCC1 will power-up instead.  
HS on  
Cyclic Sense  
Periode  
HS switch  
Filter time  
tFWK1  
Filter time  
tFWK1  
On Time  
t
1st sample taken  
as reference  
Wake detection possible  
on 2nd sample  
Figure 7  
Wake Input Timing  
Datasheet  
37  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
HS  
Filter time  
High  
Low  
Switch  
open  
closed  
WK  
High  
Low  
n-1  
n
n+1  
n+2  
WKn+2= High  
WKn+2 ≠WKn+ 1  
ðwake event  
WKn+1 = Low  
WKn = WKn+1  
ð
Learning  
Cycle  
WKn-1= High  
WKn= Low  
WKn ≠WKn-1  
ðwake event  
no wake  
INT  
High  
Low  
INT &  
WK Bit Set  
Figure 8  
Cyclic Sense Example in SBC Stop Mode, HSx starts “OFF”/LOW, GND based WKx input  
HS  
Filter time  
High  
Low  
Spike  
Switch  
open  
closed  
WK  
High  
Low  
n-1  
n
n+1  
n+2  
WKn+2= High  
WKn+2 ≠WKn+ 1  
ðwake event  
WK = WKn+1 = Low  
n
(but ignored because  
change during filter time )  
WKn = WKn+1  
Learning  
Cycle  
WKn-1= Low  
WKn= Low  
WKn = WKn-1  
ðno wake event  
VCC1  
ð
no wakTe ervaennst ition to:  
High  
SBC Sleep Mode  
SBC Normal Mode  
INT &  
WK Bit Set  
Low  
Start of  
Cyclic Sense  
Figure 9  
Cyclic Sense Example in SBC Sleep Mode, HSx starts “OFF”/HIGH,  
GND based WKx input  
The cyclic sense function will not work properly anymore in case of following conditions:  
Datasheet  
38  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
in case SBC Fail-Safe Mode is entered: The respective HS Switch will be disabled and the respective wake  
pin will be changed to static sensing  
In SBC Normal, Stop, or Sleep Mode in case of an overcurrent, overtemperature, under- or overvoltage (in  
case function is selected) event: the respective HS switch will be disabled  
Note:  
The internal timers for cyclic sense are not disabled automatically in case the HS switch is turned off  
due to above mentioned failures.This must be considered to avoid loss of wake events.  
5.2.1.2 Cyclic Sense in Low Power Mode  
If cyclic sense is intended for SBC Stop or SBC Sleep Mode mode, it is necessary to activate the cyclic sense in  
SBC Normal Mode before going to the low power mode. A wake event due to cyclic sense will set the respective  
bit WK1_WU, WK2_WU or WK3_WU. In Stop Mode the wake event will trigger an interrupt, in Sleep Mode the  
wake event will send the device via Restart Mode to Normal Mode. Before returning to SBC Sleep Mode, the  
wake status register WK_STAT_1 and WK_STAT_2 needs to be cleared. Trying to go to SBC Sleep mode with  
uncleared wake flags, such as WKx_WU the SBC will directly wake-up from Sleep Mode by going via Restart  
Mode to Normal Mode, a reset is issued. The WKx_WU bit is seen as source for the wake. This is implemented  
in order not to loose an wake event during the transition.  
5.2.2  
Cyclic Wake  
The cyclic wake feature is intended to reduce the quiescent current of the device and application.  
For the cyclic wake feature one or both timers are configured as internal wake-up source and will periodically  
trigger an interrupt in SBC Normal and SBC Stop Mode.  
The correct sequence to configure the cyclic wake is shown in Figure 10. The sequence is as follows:  
First, disable the timers to ensure that there is not unintentional interrupt when activating cyclic wake,  
Enable Timer1 and/or Timer2 as a wake-up source in the register WK_CTRL_1,  
Configure the respective period Timer1 and/or Timer2. Also an on-time (any value) must be selected to  
start the cyclic wake even if the value is ignored.  
Datasheet  
39  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
System Features  
Cyclic Wake Configuration  
Disable Timer1 and/or Timer2 as a  
To avoid unintentional interrupts  
wake source in WK_CTRL_1  
Periods : 10, 20, 50, 100, 200ms, 1s, 2s  
On-times: any  
(OFF/LOW & OFF/HIGH are not allowed)  
Select Timer Period and any  
On-Time in TIMERX_CTRL  
No interrupt will be generated ,  
if the timer is not enabled as a wake source  
Select Timer1 and/or Timer2 as a  
wake source in WK_CTRL_1  
Cyclic Wake starts / ends by  
setting / clearing On-time  
INT is pulled low at every rising edge  
of On-time except first one  
Figure 10 Cyclic Wake: Configuration and Sequence  
As in cyclic sense, the cyclic wake function will start as soon as the on-time is configured. An interrupt is  
generated for every start of the on time except for the very first time when the timer is started  
5.2.3  
Internal Timer  
The integrated Timer1 and Timer2 are typically used to wake up the microcontroller periodically (cyclic wake)  
or to perform cyclic sense on the wake inputs. Therefore, the timers can be mapped to the dedicated HS  
switches by SPI (via HS_CTRL1...2).  
Following periods and on-times can be selected via the register TIMER1_CTRL and TIMER2_CTRL  
respectively:  
Period: 10ms / 20ms / 50ms / 100ms / 200ms / 1s / 2s  
On time: 0.1ms / 0.3ms / 1.0ms / 10ms / 20ms / OFF at HIGH or LOW  
5.3  
Supervision Features  
The device offers various supervision features to support functional safety requirements. Please see  
Chapter 15 for more information.  
Datasheet  
40  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Voltage Regulator 1  
6
Voltage Regulator 1  
6.1  
Block Description  
VS  
VCC1  
Vref  
1
Overtemperature  
Shutdown  
State  
Machine  
Bandgap  
Reference  
INH  
GND  
Figure 11 Module Block Diagram  
Functional Features  
5V low-drop voltage regulator  
Undervoltage monitoring with adjustable reset level, VCC1 prewarning and VCC1 short circuit detection  
(VRT1/2/3/4, VPW,f ). Please refer to Chapter 15.6 and Chapter 15.7 for more information.  
Short circuit detection and switch off with undervoltage fail threshold, device enters SBC Fail-Safe Mode  
470nF ceramic capacitor at voltage output for stability, with ESR < 1@ f = 10 kHz, to achieve the voltage  
regulator control loop stability based on the safe phase margin (bode diagram).  
Output current capability up to IVCC1,lim.  
Datasheet  
41  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Voltage Regulator 1  
6.2  
Functional Description  
The Voltage Regulator 1 (=VCC1) is “ON” in SBC Normal and SBC Stop Mode and is disabled in SBC Sleep and  
in SBC Fail-Safe Mode. The regulator can provide an output current up to IVCC1,lim  
.
For low-quiescent current reasons, the output voltage tolerance is decreased in SBC Stop Mode because only  
a low-power mode regulator with a lower accuracy (VCC1,out41) will be active for small loads. If the load current  
on VCC1 exceeds the selected threshold (IVCC1,Ipeak1,r or IVCC1,Ipeak2,r) then the high-power mode regulator will be  
also activated to support an optimum dynamic load behavior. The current consumption will then increase by  
typ. 2.9mA.  
If the load current on VCC1 falls below the selected threshold (IVCC1,Ipeak1,f or IVCC1,Ipeak2,f), then the low-quiescent  
current mode is resumed again by disabling the high-power mode regulator.  
Both regulators (low-power mode and high-power mode) are active in SBC Normal Mode.  
Two different active peak thresholds can be selected via SPI:  
I_PEAK_TH = ‘0’(default): the lower VCC1 active peak threshold 1 is selected with lowest quiescent current  
consumption in SBC Stop Mode (IStop_1,25, IStop_1,85);  
I_PEAK_TH = ‘1’: the higher VCC1 active peak threshold 2 is selected with an increased quiescent current  
consumption in SBC Stop Mode (IStop_2,25, IStop_2,85);  
Datasheet  
42  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Voltage Regulator 1  
6.3  
Electrical Characteristics  
Table 9  
Electrical Characteristics  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; all voltages with respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin  
(unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min. Typ. Max.  
Output Voltage including line VCC1,out1  
and Load regulation  
4.9  
5.0  
5.1  
V
1)SBC Normal Mode;  
10µA < IVCC1 < 250mA  
6V < VS < 28V  
P_6.3.1  
Output Voltage including line VCC1,out2  
and Load regulation  
4.9  
5.0  
5.1  
V
V
1)SBC Normal Mode;  
10µA < IVCC1 < 150mA  
1)2)SBC Normal Mode; P_6.3.12  
20mA < IVCC1 < 90mA  
8V < VS < 18V  
P_6.3.7  
Output Voltage including line VCC1,out3  
and Load regulation  
4.97  
5.07  
25°C < Tj < 125°C  
Output Voltage including line VCC1,out41  
and Load regulation  
4.9  
4.9  
5.05 5.2  
V
SBC Stop Mode;  
1mA < IVCC1 < IVCC1,Ipeak  
P_6.3.2  
P_6.3.20  
P_6.3.4  
P_6.3.13  
Output Voltage including line VCC1,out42  
and Load regulation  
5.05 5.25  
V
SBC Stop Mode;  
10µA < IVCC1 < 1mA  
Output Drop  
VCC1,d2  
500  
5.5  
mV  
mA  
IVCC1 = 150mA  
VS=5V  
2)  
VCC1 Active Peak Threshold 1 IVCC1,Ipeak1,r  
(Transition threshold  
2.9  
I
rising;  
CC1  
VS = 13.5V  
between low-power and high-  
power mode regulator)  
-40°C < Tj < 150°C;  
I_PEAK_TH = ‘0’  
2)  
VCC1 Active Peak Threshold 1 IVCC1,Ipeak1,f 0.5  
(Transition threshold  
between high-power and low-  
power mode regulator)  
2.2  
5.5  
4.5  
mA  
mA  
mA  
I
falling;  
P_6.3.17  
P_6.3.18  
P_6.3.19  
CC1  
VS = 13.5V  
-40°C < Tj < 150°C;  
I_PEAK_TH = ‘0’  
2)  
VCC1 Active Peak Threshold 2 IVCC1,Ipeak2,r  
(Transition threshold  
between low-power and high-  
power mode regulator)  
9.0  
I
rising;  
CC1  
VS = 13.5V  
-40°C < Tj < 150°C;  
I_PEAK_TH = ‘1’  
2)  
VCC1 Active Peak Threshold 2 IVCC1,Ipeak2,f 1.7  
(Transition threshold  
between high-power and low-  
power mode regulator)  
I
falling;  
CC1  
VS = 13.5V  
-40°C < Tj < 150°C;  
I_PEAK_TH = ‘1’  
Overcurrent Limitation  
IVCC1,lim  
250  
12002) mA  
current flowing out of P_6.3.6  
pin, VCC1 = 0V  
1) In SBC Stop Mode, the specified output voltage tolerance applies when IVCC1 has exceeded the selected active peak  
threshold (IVCC1,Ipeak1,r or IVCC1,Ipeak2,r) but with increased current consumption.  
2) Not subject to production test, specified by design.  
Datasheet  
43  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Voltage Regulator 1  
Figure 12 Typical on-resistance of VCC1 pass device during low drop operation for ICC1 = 100mA  
Datasheet  
44  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Voltage Regulator 1  
Figure 13 On-resistance range of VCC1 pass device during low drop operation for ICC1 = 150mA  
Datasheet  
45  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Voltage Regulator 2  
7
Voltage Regulator 2  
7.1  
Block Description  
VS  
VCC2  
Vref  
1
Overtemperature  
Shutdown  
State  
Machine  
Bandgap  
Reference  
INH  
GND  
Figure 14 Module Block Diagram  
Functional Features  
5 V low-drop voltage regulator  
Protected against short to battery voltage, e.g. for off-board sensor supply  
Can also be used for CAN supply  
VCC2 undervoltage monitoring. Please refer to Chapter 15.8 for more information  
Can be active in SBC Normal, SBC Stop, and SBC Sleep Mode (not SBC Fail-Safe Mode)  
VCC2 switch off after entering SBC Restart Mode. Switch off is latched, LDO must be enabled via SPI after  
shutdown.  
Overtemperature protection  
470nF ceramic capacitor at output voltage for stability, with ESR < 1@ f = 10 kHz, to achieve the voltage  
regulator control loop stability based on the safe phase margin (bode diagram).  
Output current capability up to IVCC2,lim.  
Datasheet  
46  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Voltage Regulator 2  
7.2  
Functional Description  
In SBC Normal Mode VCC2 can be switched on or off via SPI.  
For SBC Stop- or Sleep Mode, the VCC2 has to be switched on or off before entering the respective SBC mode.  
The regulator can provide an output current up to IVCC2,lim  
.
For low-quiescent current reasons, the output voltage tolerance is decreased in SBC Stop Mode because only  
a low-power mode regulator with a lower accuracy (VCC2,out5) will be active for small loads. If the load current  
on VCC2 exceeds IVCC2 > IVCC2,Ipeak,r then the high-power mode regulator will also be enabled to support an  
optimum dynamic load behavior. The current consumption will then increase by typ. 2.9mA.  
If the load current on VCC2 falls below the threshold (IVCC2 < IVCC2,Ipeak,f), then the low-quiescent current mode  
is resumed again by disabling the high-power mode regulator.  
Both regulators are active in SBC Normal Mode.  
Note:  
If the VCC2 output voltage is supplying external off-board loads, the application must consider the  
series resonance circuit built by cable inductance and decoupling capacitor at the load. Sufficient  
damping must be provided.  
7.2.1  
Short to Battery Protection  
The output stage is protected for short to VBAT.  
Datasheet  
47  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Voltage Regulator 2  
7.3  
Electrical Characteristics  
Table 10  
Electrical Characteristics  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; all voltages with respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin  
(unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min. Typ. Max.  
Output Voltage including line VCC2,out1  
and Load regulation  
(SBC Normal Mode)  
4.9  
5.0  
5.1  
V
1)SBC Normal Mode;  
10µA < IVCC2 < 100mA  
6.5V < VS < 28V  
P_7.3.1  
Output Voltage including line VCC2,out2  
and Load regulation  
(SBC Normal Mode)  
4.9  
5.0  
5.1  
V
1)SBC Normal Mode;  
10µA < IVCC2 < 80mA  
6V < VS < 28V  
P_7.3.16  
Output Voltage including line VCC2,out3  
and Load regulation  
(SBC Normal Mode)  
4.9  
5.0  
5.1  
V
V
1)SBC Normal Mode;  
10µA < IVCC2 < 40mA  
P_7.3.2  
Output Voltage including line VCC2,out4  
and Load regulation  
(SBC Normal Mode)  
4.97  
5.07  
2)SBC Normal Mode;  
10µA < IVCC2 < 5mA  
8V < VS < 18V  
P_7.3.14  
25°C < Tj < 125°C  
Output Voltage including line VCC2,out5  
and Load regulation  
(SBC Stop/Sleep Mode)  
4.9  
4.9  
5.05 5.2  
V
V
Stop, Sleep Mode;  
1mA < IVCC2 < IVCC2,Ipeak  
P_7.3.3  
Output Voltage including line VCC2,out6  
and Load regulation  
5.05 5.25  
Stop, Sleep Mode;  
10µA < IVCC2 < 1mA  
P_7.3.18  
(SBC Stop/Sleep Mode)  
Output Drop  
VCC2,d1  
500 mV  
IVCC2 = 30mA  
VS = 5V  
P_7.3.4  
2)  
VCC2 Active Peak Threshold IVCC2,Ipeak,r  
(Transition threshold  
2.9  
5.5  
mA  
I
rising;  
P_7.3.15  
CC2  
VS = 13.5V  
between low-power and high-  
power mode regulator)  
-40°C < Tj < 150°C  
2)  
VCC2 Active Peak Threshold IVCC2,Ipeak,f 0.5  
(Transition threshold  
between high-power and low-  
power mode regulator)  
2.4  
mA  
I
falling;  
P_7.3.17  
CC2  
VS = 13.5V  
-40°C < Tj < 150°C  
Overcurrent limitation  
IVCC2,lim  
100  
7502) mA  
current flowing out of P_7.3.5  
pin, VCC2 = 0V  
1) In SBC Stop Mode, the specified output voltage tolerance applies when IVCC2 has exceeded the selected active peak  
threshold (IVCC2,Ipeak,r) but with increased current consumption.  
2) Not subject to production test, specified by design.  
Datasheet  
48  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Voltage Regulator 2  
Figure 15 Typical on-resistance of VCC2 pass device during low drop operation for ICC2 = 30mA  
Datasheet  
49  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Voltage Regulator 2  
Figure 16 On-resistance range of VCC2 pass device during low drop operation for ICC2 = 50mA  
Datasheet  
50  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
External Voltage Regulator 3  
8
External Voltage Regulator 3  
8.1  
Block Description  
VS  
VCC3SH  
VCC3B  
VCC3REF  
RBE  
ICC3base  
VS - VCC3shunt  
> Vshunt_threshold  
+
-
VREF  
State Machine  
Figure 17 Functional Block Diagram  
Functional Features  
Low-drop voltage regulator with external PNP transistor (up to 350mA with 470mshunt resistor)  
Four high-voltage pins are used: VS, VCC3B, VCC3SH, VCC3REF  
Configurable as stand-alone regulator (5V or 3.3V output voltage selectable via SPI) or in load-sharing  
mode with VCC1 (5V output voltage)  
4.7µF ceramic capacitor at output voltage for stability, with ESR < 150m@ f = 10 kHz to achieve the  
voltage regulator control loop stability based on the safe phase margin (bode diagram).  
Overcurrent limitation with external shunt in stand-alone configuration  
Adjustable load current sharing ratio between VCC1 and VCC3 for load-sharing configuration  
Undervoltage shutdown in stand-alone configuration only  
Table 11  
VCC1 configuration VCC3 voltage for VCC3_ V_CFG = 0  
VCC1 = 5.0V VCC3 = 5.0V  
1)External Voltage Regulator Configurations depending on VCC1 output voltage  
VCC3 voltage for VCC3_ V_CFG = 1  
VCC3 = 3.3V  
1) This settings are valid only for the VCC3 stand-alone configuration. The bit VCC3_ V_CFG is ignored for VCC3 load  
sharing configuration  
Datasheet  
51  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
External Voltage Regulator 3  
8.2  
Functional Description  
The external voltage regulator can be used as an independent voltage regulator or in load-sharing mode with  
VCC1. Setting VCC3_ON in the M_S_CTRL register in SBC Normal Mode sets the stand-alone configuration of  
VCC3 as an independent voltage regulator. The load sharing configuration is set via the SPI bit VCC3_LS in the  
HW_CTRL register.  
VCC3  
load sharing?  
Default value of  
VCC3_LS = ‘0'  
No  
VCC3  
output voltage  
in stand-alone  
configuration  
Yes  
5.0V  
3.3V  
Set bit  
Set bit  
Set bit  
VCC3_LS = 1  
VCC3_V_CFG = 0  
VCC3_V_CFG = 1  
VCC3_V_CFG is  
automatically set to 0  
Set bit  
Set bit  
VCC3_ON = 0 or 1  
VCC3_ON = 0 or 1  
VCC3_LS, VCC3_ON and  
VCC3_V_CFG cannot be  
changed anymore  
VCC3_LS and VCC3_V_CFG  
cannot be changed anymore  
(once VCC3_ON is set for the first time)  
stand-alone  
configuration  
VCC3 = 5V  
stand-alone  
configuration  
VCC3 = 3.3V  
VCC3 load sharing  
VCC3 = VCC1  
Figure 18 Selecting the Configuration of the VCC3 Regulator  
Depending on the configuration the regulator will act in the respective SBC Mode as described in Table 12.  
After the VCC3 configuration has been selected, it cannot be changed anymore.  
In stand-alone configuration the maximum current ICC3max is defined by the current limitation determined by  
the used shunt. In load sharing configuration, the shunt is used to determine the current ratio between VCC1  
and VCC3. Since the junction temperature of the external PNP transistor cannot be sensed by the SBC, it  
cannot be protected against overtemperature by the SBC. Therefore the thermal behavior has to be analyzed  
by the application.  
For low-quiescent current reasons, the output voltage tolerance is decreased in SBC Stop Mode because a  
low-power mode regulator with a lower accuracy will be active for small loads. If the base current on VCC3  
exceeds IVCC3base > IVCC3base,Ipeak,r then the high-power mode regulator is enabled additionally to support an  
optimum dynamic load behavior. If the base current on VCC3 falls below the threshold (IVCC3base  
<
IVCC3base,Ipeak,f), then the low-quiescent current consumption is resumed again by disabling the high-power  
mode regulator.  
Only the high-power mode regulator is active in SBC Normal Mode.  
The status of VCC3 is reported in the SUP_STAT_2 SPI register. The regulator will switch OFF in case of VS  
dropping below VS_UV regardless of the VCC3 configuration and will be automatically enabled again when  
exceeding this threshold voltage unless the control bit VCC3_VS_ UV_OFF is set, i.e. in order to keep VCC3  
enabled below VS_UV the bit VCC3_VS_ UV_OFF must be set. VCC3 will also stay active in SBC Stop Mode  
when the bit VCC3_LS_ STP_ON is set and when load sharing is configured (for detailed protection features  
see Chapter 15.7 and Chapter 16.3).  
Datasheet  
52  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
External Voltage Regulator 3  
Table 12  
External Voltage Regulator State by SBC Mode  
SBC Mode  
Load Sharing Mode1)  
Independent Voltage Regulator  
INIT Mode  
OFF  
OFF  
Normal Mode  
Stop Mode  
Sleep Mode  
Restart Mode  
Fail-Safe Mode  
Configurable  
OFF/Fixed2)  
OFF  
Configurable  
Fixed  
Fixed  
ON or ramping  
Fixed  
OFF  
OFF  
1) Behaves as VCC1 and has to be configured in SBC Normal Mode  
2) Load Sharing operation in SBC Stop Mode is by default disabled for power saving reasons but VCC3_LS bit will stay  
set. However, it can be also configured via the SPI bit VCC3_LS_ STP_ON to stay enabled in SBC Stop Mode.  
Notes  
1. The configuration of the VCC3 voltage regulator behavior must be done immediately after power-up of the  
device and cannot be changed afterwards as long as the device is supplied.  
2. As soon as the bit VCC3_ON or VCC3_LS is set for the first time, the configuration for VCC3 cannot be changed  
anymore. This configuration is valid - also after a SBC Soft Reset - as long as the SBC is powered.  
3. If the VCC3 output voltage is supplying external off-board loads, the application must consider the series  
resonance circuit built by cable inductance and decoupling capacitor at the load. Sufficient damping must be  
provided (e.g. a 100Ohm resistor between the PNP collector and VCC3REF with 10uF capacitor on collector -  
see also Figure 19).  
8.2.1  
External Voltage Regulator as Independent Voltage Regulator  
Configured as an independent voltage regulator the SBC offers with VCC3 a third supply which could be used  
as off-board supply e.g. for sensors due to the integrated HV pins VCC3B, VCC3SH, VCC3REF.  
This configuration is set and locked by enabling VCC3_ON while keeping VCC3_LS = 0. VCC3 can be switched  
ON or OFF but the configuration cannot be changed anymore. However, the SPI_FAIL is not set while trying to  
change the configuration.  
An overcurrent limitation function is realized with the external shunt (see Chapter 8.4 for calculating the  
desired shunt value) and the output current shunt voltage threshold (Vshunt_threshold). If this threshold is  
reached, then ICC3 is limited and only the current limitation bit VCC3_OC is set (no other reaction) and can be  
cleared via SPI once the overcurrent condition is not present anymore. If the overcurrent limitation feature is  
not needed, then connect the pins VCC3SH and VS together.  
In this configuration VCC3 has the undervoltage signalization enabled and an undervoltage event is signaled  
with the bit VCC3_UV in the SUP_STAT_2 SPI register.  
Note:  
To avoid undesired current consumption increase of the device it must be ensured that VCC3 is not  
connected to VCC1 in this configuration.  
Datasheet  
53  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
External Voltage Regulator 3  
VS  
VCC3  
RSHUNT  
T1  
ICC3  
C2  
C1  
RLim  
100Ω  
VS  
VCC3SH  
VCC3B  
RBE  
VCC3REF  
ICC3base  
VS - VCC3shunt  
> Vshunt_threshold  
+
-
VREF  
State Machine  
Figure 19 Protecting the VCC3 against inductive short circuits when configured as an independent  
voltage regulator for off-board supply  
8.2.2  
External Voltage Regulator in Load Sharing Mode  
The purpose of the load sharing mode is to increase the total current capability of VCC1 without increase of  
the power dissipation within the SBC. The load current is shared between the VCC1 internal regulator and the  
external PNP transistor of VCC3. Figure 20 shows the setup for Load Sharing. Load Sharing is active in SBC  
Normal Mode. It can also be configured via SPI to stay active in SBC Stop Mode.  
An input voltage up to VSx,MAX is regulated to VCC3,nom = 5.0 V with a precision of ±2% when used in the load  
sharing configuration in SBC Normal Mode.  
This configuration is set and locked by enabling VCC3_LS for the first time while VCC3_ON has no function, i.e.  
keep VCC3_ON = 0. Trying to change the VCC3 configuration after VCC3_LS has been set will result in the  
SPI_FAIL bit being set and keeping the VCC3 configurations unchanged. Load sharing will be automatically  
disabled (only if VCC3_LS_ STP_ON = 0) during SBC Stop Mode due to power saving reasons but the bit will  
remain set to automatically switch back on after returning to SBC Normal Mode. It must be ensured that the  
same VCC3 output voltage level is selected as for VCC1.  
In this configuration VCC3 has no undervoltage signalization. VCC3 shuts down if Fail-Safe Mode is reached,  
e.g. due to undervoltage shutdown (VS,UV monitoring).  
VCC3 has no overcurrent limitation in this configuration and the shunt resistor is defining the load sharing  
ratio between the VCC1 and VCC3 load currents (see Equation (8.2) in Chapter 8.4). Thus, no overcurrent  
condition VCC3_OC will be signaled in this configuration.  
Datasheet  
54  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
External Voltage Regulator 3  
VS  
VCC13  
RSHUNT  
T1  
ICC3  
C1  
C2  
VS  
VCC3SH  
VCC3B  
VCC3REF  
Vcc3  
Vcc1  
ICC1  
Figure 20 VCC3 in Load Sharing Configuration  
8.3  
External Components  
Characterization is performed with the BCP52-16 from Infineon (ICC3 < 200 mA) and with MJD253.  
Other PNP transistors can be used. However, the functionality must be checked in the application.  
Figure 20 shows one hardware set up used.  
Table 13  
Device  
C2  
Bill of Materials for the VCC3 Function with and without load sharing configuration  
Vendor  
Murata  
-
Reference / Value  
10 µF/10 V GCM31CR71A106K64L  
1 (with / without LS)  
BCP52-16  
RSHUNT  
T1  
Infineon  
Note:  
The SBC is not able to ensure a thermal protection of the external PNP transistor. The power  
handling capabilities for the application must therefore be chosen according to the selected PNP  
device, the PCB layout and properties of the application to prevent thermal damage, e.g. via the  
shunt current limitation in stand alone configuration or by selecting the proper ICC1/ICC3 ratio in  
load-sharing configuration.  
Note:  
To ensure an optimum EMC behavior of the VCC3 regulator when the VCC3 output is leaving the PCB,  
it is necessary to optimize the PCB layout to have the PNP very close to the SBC. If this is not sufficient  
or possible, an external capacitance should be placed to the off-board connector (see also  
Chapter 17.1).  
Datasheet  
55  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
External Voltage Regulator 3  
8.4  
Calculation of RSHUNT  
As a independent regulator, the maximum current ICC3max where the limit starts and the bit ICC3 > ICC3max is set is  
determined by the shunt resistor RSHUNT and the Output Current Shunt Voltage Threshold Vshunt_threshold  
.
The resistor can be calculated as following:  
Ushunt _ threshold  
(8.1)  
RSHUNT  
=
ICC3 max  
If VCC3 is configured for load sharing, then the shunt resistor determines the load sharing ratio between VCC1  
and VCC3. The ratio can be calculated as following:  
I CC  
I CC  
110 Ω 105 15 mV  
I CC  
1
3
1
=
( a )  
(8.2)  
R
SHUNT  
I CC 110 Ω 105 15 mV  
1
I CC  
=
( b )  
3
R
SHUNT  
Example: A shunt resistor with 470mand a load current of 100mA out of VCC1 would result in ICC3 = 191mA.  
8.5  
Unused Pins  
In case the VCC3 is not used in the application, it is recommended to connect the unused pins of VCC3 as  
followed:  
Connect VCC3SH to VS or leave open;  
Leave VCC3B open;  
Leave VCC3REF open  
Do not enable the VCC3 via SPI as this leads to increased current consumption  
Datasheet  
56  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
External Voltage Regulator 3  
8.6  
Electrical Characteristics  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; SBC Normal Mode; all outputs open; all voltages with respect to ground;  
positive current defined flowing into pin; unless otherwise specified.  
Table 14  
Electrical Characteristics  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Values  
Unit Note or Test Condition Number  
Min. Typ. Max.  
Parameters independent from Test Set-up  
External Regulator Control IVCC3base  
Drive Current Capability  
40  
60  
3
80  
10  
10  
310  
5
mA VVCC3base = 13.5 V  
P_8.6.1  
P_8.6.2  
P_8.6.3  
P_8.6.6  
P_8.6.7  
P_8.6.8  
P_8.6.9  
Input Current VCC3ref  
IVCC3ref  
0
0
µA  
µA  
mV  
µs  
VVCC3ref = 5 V  
Input Current VCC3  
IVCC3shunt  
3
VVCC3shunt = VS  
Shunt Pin  
1)  
Output Current Shunt  
Voltage Threshold  
Vshunt_threshold 180  
245  
5)  
Current increase regulation trIinc  
reaction time  
V
= 5 V to 0 V;  
CC3  
ICC3base = 20 mA Figure 21  
5)  
Current decrease regulation trIdec  
reaction time  
5
µs  
V
= 0 V to 5V;  
CC3  
ICC3base = 20 mA Figure 21  
Leakage current of  
VCC3base when VCC3  
disabled  
IVCC3base_lk  
5
µA  
VCC3base = VS;  
Tj = 25°C  
Leakage current of VCC3shunt IVCC3shunt_lk  
when VCC3 disabled  
5
µA  
VCC3shunt = VS;  
Tj = 25°C  
P_8.6.11  
P_8.6.12  
P_8.6.33  
Base to emitter resistor  
RBE  
120  
150  
50  
185  
65  
kVCC3 = OFF;  
Active Peak Threshold VCC3 IVCC3base,Ipeak,r  
(Transition threshold  
between low-power and  
µA  
5)Drive current IVCC3base  
VCC3base rising  
;
;
I
VS =13.5V;  
-40°C < Tj < 150°C  
5)Drive current IVCC3base  
high-power mode regulator)  
Active Peak Threshold VCC3 IVCC3base,Ipeak,f 15  
(Transition threshold  
between high-power and  
30  
µA  
P_8.6.34  
P_8.6.13  
IVCC3base falling  
VS =13.5V;  
-40°C < Tj < 150°C  
low-power mode regulator)  
Parameters dependent on the Test Set-up (with external PNP device MJD-253)  
External Regulator Output VCC3.out1  
Voltage (VCC3 = 5.0V)  
4.9  
5
5.1  
V
2)SBC Normal Mode;  
load sharing  
configuration with 470  
mshunt resistor;  
10 µA < IVCC1 + IVCC3  
< 300 mA;  
Datasheet  
57  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
External Voltage Regulator 3  
Table 14  
Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Values  
Unit Note or Test Condition Number  
Min. Typ. Max.  
External Regulator Output VCC3,out2  
Voltage  
(VCC3 = 5.0V)  
4.9  
5
5.1  
V
V
V
V
2)SBC Normal Mode;  
stand-alone  
configuration  
10 mA < IVCC3 < 300 mA;  
2)SBC Stop-, Sleep Mode; P_8.6.15  
Stand-alone  
configuration  
10µA < IVCC3 < IVCC3_peak,r  
2)SBC Normal Mode;  
stand-alone  
configuration  
10 mA < IVCC3 < 300 mA;  
2)SBC Stop-, Sleep Mode; P_8.6.23  
Stand-alone  
configuration  
10µA < IVCC3 < IVCC3_peak,r  
5)6)6.0V < VS < 28V;  
SBC Normal Mode;  
LS ratio for a 470 mΩ  
shunt resistor and total  
load current of 300mA  
5)6)6.0V < VS < 28V;  
P_8.6.14  
External Regulator Output VCC3,out3  
Voltage  
(VCC3 = 5.0V)  
4.8  
5
5.24)  
3)  
External Regulator Output VCC3,out4  
Voltage  
(VCC3 = 3.3V)  
3.23 3.3V 3.37  
3.15 3.3V 3.454)  
P_8.6.22  
External Regulator Output VCC3,out5  
Voltage  
(VCC3 = 3.3V)  
3)  
Load Sharing Ratio  
ICC1 : ICC3  
RatioLS_1,VCC3 1 :  
1 :  
1 :  
P_8.6.16  
P_8.6.20  
P_8.6.27  
1.35 1.9  
2.45  
Load Sharing Ratio  
ICC1 : ICC3  
RatioLS_2,VCC3 1 :  
1 :  
1 :  
0.67 0.95 1.23  
SBC Normal Mode;  
LS ratio for a 1 shunt  
resistor and total load  
current of 300mA  
5)6) Tj = 150°C;  
8.0V < VS < 18V;  
Load Sharing Ratio  
ICC1 : ICC3  
RatioLS_3,VCC3 1 :  
1 :  
1 :  
1.50 1.95 2.40  
SBC Normal Mode;  
LS ratio for a 470 mΩ  
shunt resistor and total  
load current of 300mA  
Load Sharing Ratio  
ICC1 : ICC3  
RatioLS_4,VCC3 1 :  
1 :  
1 :  
5)6) Tj = 150°C;  
8.0V < VS < 18V;  
P_8.6.28  
0.75 0.98 1.21  
SBC Normal Mode;  
LS ratio for a 1 shunt  
resistor and total load  
current of 300mA  
1) Threshold at which the current limitation starts to operate. This threshold is only active when VCC3 is configured for  
stand-alone configuration.  
2) Tolerance includes load regulation and line regulation.  
3)  
I
VCC3_peak refers to the load current out of the collector of the external PNP device. This value can be calculated by  
multiplying the VCC3base active peak threshold (IVCC3base,Ipeak) with the current gain of the PNP  
Datasheet  
58  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
External Voltage Regulator 3  
4) At Tj > 125°C, the power transistor leakage could be increased, which has to be added to the quiescent current of the  
application independently if the regulator is turned on/off. To prevent an overvoltage condition at no load due to this  
increased leakage, an internal clamping structure will automatically turn on at typ. 200mV above the upper limit of the  
programmed output voltage.  
5) Not subject to production test, specified by design.  
6) a) Ratio will change depending on the chosen shunt resistor which value is correlating to the maximum power  
dissipation of the PNP pass device. See Chapter 8.4 for the ratio calculation. The ratio will also change at low-drop  
operation.  
For supply voltages of 5.5V < VS < 6V the accuracy applies only for a total load current of 250mA.  
The load sharing ratio in SBC Stop Mode has +/-10% wider limits than specified.  
b) The output voltage precision in load sharing in SBC Stop Mode is according to VCC1 +/-4% or better for loads up to  
20mA and +/-2% with loads greater than 20mA.  
In SBC Normal the +/-2% precision for 5V/3.3V tolerance is valid regardless of the applied load.  
Notes  
1. There is no thermal protection available for the external PNP transistor. Therefore, the application must be  
designed to avoid overheating of the PNP via the shunt current limitation in stand alone configuration and by  
selecting the proper ICC1/ICC3 ratio in load-sharing configuration.  
2. In SBC Stop Mode, the same output voltage tolerance applies as in SBC Normal Mode when IVCC3 has exceeded  
the selected active peak threshold (IVCC3base,Ipeak) but with increased current consumption.  
Datasheet  
59  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
External Voltage Regulator 3  
Timing diagram for regulator reaction time “current increase regulation reaction time” and “current decrease  
regulation reaction time”  
VCC3  
t
ICCbase  
ICC3base, 50%  
t
trlinc  
trldec  
Figure 21 Regulator Reaction Time  
Datasheet  
60  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
External Voltage Regulator 3  
Typical Load Sharing Characteristics using the BCP52-16 PNP transistor and a 1 shunt resistor  
0,35  
Tj = 27°C  
0,30  
Tj = 150°C  
0,25  
0,20  
0,15  
0,10  
0,05  
0
Tj = -40°C  
0
0,2  
0,4  
0,6  
0,8  
- Icc3 vs. Icc1  
1,0  
1,2  
1,4  
Load Sharing Ratio
Figure 22 Load Sharing Ratio ICC1 : ICC3 vs. the total load current  
0,35  
Tj = 27°C  
0,30  
Tj = 150°C  
0,25  
0,20  
0,15  
0,10  
0,05  
0
Tj = -40°C  
0
0,02  
0,04  
0,06  
0,08  
0,10  
0,12  
0,14  
0,16  
Load Current - Icc1  
Figure 23 Load Sharing Behavior of ICC1 vs. the total load current  
Datasheet  
61  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
High-Side Switch  
9
High-Side Switch  
9.1  
Block Description  
HSx  
VSHS  
HS Gate Control  
Overcurrent Detection  
Open Load (On)  
Figure 24 High-Side Module Block Diagram  
Features  
Dedicated supply pin VSHS for high-side outputs  
Overvoltage and undervoltage switch off - configurable via SPI  
Overcurrent detection and switch off  
Open load detection in ON-state  
PWM capability with internal timer configurable via SPI  
Switch recovery after removal of OV or UV condition configurable via SPI  
9.2  
Functional Description  
The High-Side switches can be used for control of LEDs, as supply for the wake inputs and for other loads. The  
High-Side outputs can be controlled either directly via SPI by (HS_CTRL1, HS_CTRL2), by the integrated  
timers or by the integrated PWM generators.  
The high-side outputs are supplied by a dedicated supply pin VSHS (different to VS). The topology supports  
improved cranking condition behavior.  
The configuration of the High-Side (Permanent On, PWM, cyclic sense, etc.) drivers must be done in SBC  
Normal Mode. The configuration is taken over in SBC Stop- or SBC Sleep Mode and cannot be modified. When  
entering SBC Restart Mode or SBC Fail-Safe Mode the HSx outputs are disabled.  
Datasheet  
62  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
High-Side Switch  
9.2.1  
Over- and Undervoltage Switch Off  
All HS drivers in on-state are switched off in case of overvoltage on VSHS (VSHS,OVD). If the voltage drops below  
the overvoltage threshold the HS drivers are activated again. The feature can be disabled by setting the SPI bit  
HS_OV_SD_EN.  
The HS drivers are switched off in case of undervoltage on VSHS (VSHS,UVD). If the voltage rises above the  
undervoltage threshold the HS drivers are activated again. The feature can be disabled by setting the SPI bit  
HS_UV_SD_EN.  
So after release of undervoltage or overvoltage condition the HS switch goes back to programmed state in  
which it was configured via SPI. This behavior is only valid if the bit HS_OV_UV_REC is set to ‘1’. Otherwise the  
switches will stay off and the respective SPI control bits are cleared.  
The overvoltage and undervoltage is signaled in the bits VSHS_OV and VSHS_UV, no other error bits are set.  
9.2.2  
Overcurrent Detection and Switch Off  
If the load current exceeds the overcurrent shutdown threshold for a time longer then the overcurrent  
shutdown filter time the output is switched off.  
The overcurrent condition and the switch off is signaled with the respective HSx_OC_OT bit in the register  
HS_OC_OT_STAT. The HSx configuration is then reset to 000 by the SBC. To activate the High-Side again the  
HSx configuration has to be set to ON (001) or be programmed to a timer function. It is recommended to clear  
the overcurrent bit before activation the High-Side switch, as the bits are not cleared automatically by the  
SBC.  
9.2.3  
Open Load Detection  
Open load detection on the High-Side outputs is done during on state of the output. If the current in the  
activated output falls below then Open Load Detection current, the open load is detected and signaled via the  
respective bit HS1_OL, HS2_OL, HS3_OL, or HS4_OL in the register HS_OL_STAT. The High-Side output stays  
activated. If the open load condition disappears the Open Load bit in the SPI can be cleared. The bits are not  
cleared automatically by the SBC.  
9.2.4  
HSx Operation in Different SBC Modes  
During SBC Stop and SBC Sleep Mode the HSx outputs can be used for the cyclic sense feature. The open-  
load detection, overcurrent shut down as well as overvoltage and undervoltage shutdown are available.  
The overcurrent shutdown protection feature may influence the wake-up behavior1).  
the HSx output can also be enabled for SBC Stop and SBC Sleep Mode as well as controlled by the PWMx  
generator. The HSx outputs must be configured in SBC Normal Mode before entering a low-power mode.  
The HSx outputs are switched off during SBC Restart or SBC Fail-Safe Mode. They can be enabled via SPI if  
the failure condition is removed.  
9.2.5  
PWM and Timer Function  
Two 8-bit PWM generators are dedicated to generate a PWM signal on the HS outputs, e.g. for brightness  
adjustment or compensation of supply voltage fluctuation. The PWM generators are mapped to the dedicated  
HS outputs, and the duty cycle can be independently configured with a 8bit resolution via SPI (PWM1_CTRL,  
1) For the wake feature, the forced overcurrent shut down case must be considered in the user software for all SBC Modes, i.e. due to  
disabled HSx switches a level change might not be detected anymore at WKx pins.  
Datasheet  
63  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
High-Side Switch  
PWM2_CTRL). Two different frequencies (200Hz, 400Hz) can be selected independently for every PWM  
generator in the register PWM_FREQ_CTRL.  
PWM Assignment and Configuration:  
Configure duty cycle and frequency for respective PWM generator in PWM1_CTRL/PWM2_CTRL and  
PWM_FREQ_CTRL  
Assign PWM generator to respective HS switch(es) in HSx_CTRL  
The PWM generation will start right after the HSx is assigned to the PWM generator (HS_CTRL1, HS_CTRL2)  
Assignment options of HS1... HS4  
Timer 1  
Timer 2  
PWM 1  
PWM 2  
Minimum On-time during PWM Operation  
The min. on-time during PWM is limited by the actual on- and off-time of the respective HS switch, e.g. the  
PWM setting ‘0000 0001’ could not be realized.  
Reliable Open-Load Detection during PWM Operation  
The minimum PWM setting for a reliable open-load detection is 3digits for a period of 400Hz and >2 digits for  
the frequency setting of 200Hz, i.e. the high-side on-time must be longer than tOL,HS  
.
Reliable Overcurrent Detection during PWM Operation  
The minimum PWM setting for a reliable overcurrent detection is >1 digit for a period of 400Hz and 1 digit for  
the frequency setting of 200Hz, i.e. the high-side on-time must be longer than tSD,HS  
.
Datasheet  
64  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
High-Side Switch  
9.3  
Electrical Characteristics  
Table 15  
Electrical Characteristics  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; all voltages with respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin  
(unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
Max.  
Output HS1, HS2, HS3, HS4  
Static Drain-Source ON  
Resistance HS1...HS4  
RON,HS25  
RON,HS150  
Ileak,HS  
7
10  
16  
2
Ids = 60mA,  
Tj < 25°C  
P_9.3.1  
P_9.3.2  
P_9.3.11  
Static Drain-Source ON  
Resistance HS1...HS4  
11.5  
Ids = 60mA,  
Tj < 150°C  
1)0 V < VHSx  
Leakage Current HSx / per  
channel  
µA  
< VSHS  
;
Tj < 85°C  
Output Slew Rate (rising)  
Output Slew Rate (falling)  
Switch-on time HSx  
SRraise,HS  
SRfall,HS  
tON,HS  
0.8  
-2.5  
3
2.5  
-0.8  
30  
V/µs 1)20 to 80%  
VSHS = 6 to 18V  
RL = 220Ω  
P_9.3.3  
P_9.3.4  
P_9.3.5  
V/µs 1)80 to 20%  
VSHS = 6 to 18V  
RL = 220Ω  
µs  
CSN = HIGH to  
0.8*VSHS;  
RL = 220;  
VSHS = 6 to 18V  
Switch-off time HSx  
tOFF,HS  
3
30  
µs  
CSN = HIGH to  
0.2*VSHS;  
RL = 220;  
P_9.3.6  
P_9.3.7  
VSHS = 6 to 18V  
Short Circuit Shutdown  
Current  
ISD,HS  
150  
245  
300  
mA  
VSHS = 6 to 20V,  
hysteresis  
included  
2) 3)  
Short Circuit Shutdown  
Filter Time  
tSD,HS  
12  
16  
20  
3
µs  
,
P_9.3.8  
P_9.3.9  
P_9.3.14  
P_9.3.10  
Open Load Detection  
Current  
IOL,HS  
0.4  
0.05  
50  
mA  
mA  
µs  
hysteresis  
included  
1)  
Open Load Detection  
hysteresis  
IOL,HS,hys  
0.45  
64  
1.0  
80  
2) 3)  
Open Load Detection Filter tOL,HS  
,
Time  
1) Not subject to production test, specified by design.  
2) Not subject to production test, tolerance defined by internal oscillator tolerance.  
3) Configure proper minimum PWM settings for reliable detection of overcurrent and open load measurement (see also  
Chapter 9.2.5).  
Datasheet  
65  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
High Speed CAN Transceiver  
10  
High Speed CAN Transceiver  
10.1  
Block Description  
VCAN  
VCC1  
SPI Mode  
Control  
RTXD  
Driver  
CANH  
CANL  
Output  
Stage  
TXDCAN  
Temp.-  
Protection  
+
timeout  
To SPI diagnostic  
VCAN  
VBIAS = 2.5V  
VCC1  
RXDCAN  
MUX  
Receiver  
Vs  
Wake  
Receiver  
Figure 25 Functional Block Diagram  
10.2  
Functional Description  
The Controller Area Network (CAN) transceiver part of the SBC provides high-speed (HS) differential mode  
data transmission (up to 2 Mbaud) and reception in automotive and industrial applications. It works as an  
interface between the CAN protocol controller and the physical bus lines compatible to ISO 11898-2:2016 and  
SAE J2284.  
The CAN transceiver offers low power modes to reduce current consumption. This supports networks with  
partially powered down nodes. To support software diagnostic functions, a CAN Receive-only Mode is  
implemented.  
It is designed to provide excellent passive behavior when the transceiver is switched off (mixed networks,  
clamp15/30 applications).  
A wake-up from the CAN wake capable mode is possible via a message on the bus. Thus, the microcontroller  
can be powered down or idled and will be woken up by the CAN bus activities.  
The CAN transceiver is designed to withstand the severe conditions of automotive applications and to support  
12 V applications.  
Datasheet  
66  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
High Speed CAN Transceiver  
The different transceiver modes can be controlled via the SPI CAN bits.  
Figure 26 shows the possible transceiver mode transitions when changing the SBC mode.  
SBC Mode  
CAN Transceiver Mode  
SBC Stop Mode  
Receive Only Wake Capable Normal Mode  
OFF  
OFF  
SBC Normal Mode  
SBC Sleep Mode  
SBC Restart Mode  
SBC Fail-Safe Mode  
Receive Only Wake Capable Normal Mode  
Wake Capable2  
OFF2  
OFF  
Woken1  
Wake Capable  
Behavior after SBC Restart Mode - not coming from SBC Sleep Mode due to a wake up of the respective transceiver:  
If the transceivers had been configured to Normal Mode, or Receive Only Mode, then the mode will be changed to Wake  
Capable. If it was Wake Capable, then it will remain Wake Capable. If it had been OFF before SBC Restart Mode, then it  
will remain OFF.  
Behavior in SBC Development Mode:  
CAN default value in SBC INIT MODE and entering SBC Normal Mode from SBC Init Mode is ON instead of OFF.  
1 After a wake event on CAN Bus.  
2 Must be set to CAN wake capable / CAN off mode before entering SBC Sleep Mode.  
Figure 26 CAN Mode Control Diagram  
CAN FD Support  
CAN FD stands for ‘CAN with Flexible Data Rate’. It is based on the well established CAN protocol as specified  
in ISO 11898-1. CAN FD still uses the CAN bus arbitration method. The benefit is that the bit rate can be  
increased by switching to a shorter bit time at the end of the arbitration process and then to return to the  
longer bit time at the CRC delimiter, before the receivers transmit their acknowledge bits. See also Figure 27.  
In addition, the effective data rate is increased by allowing longer data fields. CAN FD allows the transmission  
of up to 64 data bytes compared to the 8 data bytes from the standard CAN.  
Standard CAN  
message  
Data phase  
(Byte 0 – Byte 7)  
CAN Header  
CAN Footer  
Example:  
- 11bit identifier + 8Byte data  
CAN FD with  
reduced bit time  
Data phase  
(Byte 0 – Byte 7)  
CAN Header  
CAN Footer  
- Arbitration Phase  
- Data Phase  
500kbps  
2Mbps  
àaverage bit rate  
1.14Mbps  
Figure 27 Bite Rate Increase with CAN FD vs. Standard CAN  
Not only the physical layer must support CAN FD but also the CAN controller. In case the CAN controller is not  
able to support CAN FD then the respective CAN node must at least tolerate CAN FD communication. This  
Datasheet  
67  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
High Speed CAN Transceiver  
CAN FD tolerant mode is realized in the physical layer in combination with CAN Partial Networking.  
The TLE926x-3BQX variants of this family also support the CAN FD tolerant mode.  
10.2.1  
CAN OFF Mode  
The CAN OFF Mode is the default mode after power-up of the SBC. It is available in all SBC Modes and is  
intended to completely stop CAN activities or when CAN communication is not needed. The CANH/L bus  
interface acts as a high impedance input with a very small leakage current. In CAN OFF Mode, a wake-up event  
on the bus will be ignored.  
10.2.2  
CAN Normal Mode  
The CAN Transceiver is enabled via SPI in SBC Normal Mode. CAN Normal Mode is designed for normal data  
transmission/reception within the HS-CAN network. The Mode is available in SBC Normal Mode and in SBC  
Stop Mode. The bus biasing is set to VCAN/2.  
Transmission  
The signal from the microcontroller is applied to the TXDCAN input of the SBC. The bus driver switches the  
CANH/L output stages to transfer this input signal to the CAN bus lines.  
Enabling sequence  
The CAN transceiver requires an enabling time tCAN,EN before a message can be sent on the bus. This means  
that the TXDCAN signal can only be pulled LOW after the enabling time. If this is not ensured, then the TXDCAN  
needs to be set back to HIGH (=recessive) until the enabling time is completed.  
Only the next dominant bit will be transmitted on the bus.  
Figure 28 shows different scenarios and explanations for CAN enabling.  
V
TXDCAN  
t
CAN  
Mode  
t CAN,EN  
tCAN,EN  
t CAN,EN  
CAN  
NORMAL  
CAN  
OFF  
t
t
V
CANDIFF  
Dominant  
Recessive  
recessive TXD level  
required before start of  
transmission  
Correct sequence ,  
Bus is enabled after tCAN,  
tCAN, EN not ensured , no  
transmission on bus  
tCAN, not ensured ,  
no transmission on bus  
recessive TXD  
level required  
EN  
EN  
Figure 28 CAN Transceiver Enabling Sequence  
Reduced Electromagnetic Emission  
To reduce electromagnetic emissions (EME), the bus driver controls CANH/L slopes symmetrically.  
Reception  
Analog CAN bus signals are converted into digital signals at RXD via the differential input receiver.  
Datasheet  
68  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
High Speed CAN Transceiver  
10.2.3  
CAN Receive Only Mode  
In CAN Receive Only Mode (RXD only), the driver stage is de-activated but reception is still operational. This  
mode is accessible by an SPI command in Normal Mode and in Stop Mode. The bus biasing is set to VCAN/2.  
10.2.4  
CAN Wake Capable Mode  
This mode can be used in SBC Stop, Sleep, Restart and Normal Mode and it is used to monitor bus activities.  
It is automatically accessed in SBC Fail-Safe Mode. Both bus pins CANH/L are connected to GND via the input  
resistors.  
A wake-up signal on the bus results in a change of behavior of the SBC, as described in Table 16. The pins  
CANH/L are terminated to typ. 2.5V through the input resistors. As a wake-up signalization to the  
microcontroller, the RXD_CAN pin is set LOW and will stay LOW until the CAN transceiver is changed to any  
other mode. After a wake-up event, the transceiver can be switched to CAN Normal Mode for communication  
via SPI.  
As shown in Figure 29, a wake-up pattern (WUP) is signaled on the bus by two consecutive dominant bus  
levels for at least tWake1 (filter time t > tWake1) and shorter than tWake2, each separated by a recessive bus level  
of greater than tWake1 and shorter than tWake2  
.
Datasheet  
69  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
High Speed CAN Transceiver  
Entering low-power mode,  
when selective wake-up  
function is disabled  
or not supported  
Bus recessive > tWAKE1  
Ini  
Wait  
Bias off  
Bias off  
Bus dominant > tWAKE1  
optional:  
tWAKE2 expired  
1
Bias off  
Bus recessive > tWAKE1  
optional:  
tWAKE2 expired  
2
Bias off  
Bus dominant > tWAKE1  
Silence expired AND  
t
Entering CAN Normal  
or CAN Recive Only  
Device in low-power mode  
3
Bias on  
Bus dominant > tWAKE1  
Bus recessive > tWAKE1  
tSilence expired AND  
device in low-power mode  
4
Bias on  
Figure 29 WUP detection following the definition in ISO 11898-2:2016  
Rearming the Transceiver for Wake Capability  
After a BUS wake-up event, the transceiver is woken. However, the CAN transceiver mode bits will still show  
wake capable (=‘01’) so that the RXD signal will be pulled low. There are two possibilities how the CAN  
transceiver’s wake capable mode is enabled again after a wake event:  
The CAN transceiver mode must be toggled, i.e. switched from Wake Capable Mode to CAN Normal Mode,  
CAN Receive Only Mode or CAN Off, before switching to CAN Wake Capable Mode again.  
Rearming is done automatically when the SBC is changed to SBC Stop or SBC Fail-Safe Mode to ensure  
wake-up capability.  
CAN must be set to CAN wake capable / CAN off mode before entering SBC Sleep Mode  
Notes  
1. It is not necessary to clear the CAN wake-up bit CAN_WU to become wake capable again. It is sufficient to  
toggle the CAN mode.  
2. The CAN module is supplied by an internal voltage when in CAN Wake Capable Mode, i.e. the module does not  
need to be supplied by the VCAN pin during this time. Before changing the CAN Mode to Normal Mode, the  
supply of VCAN has to be activated first.  
Datasheet  
70  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
High Speed CAN Transceiver  
Wake-Up in SBC Stop and Normal Mode  
In SBC Stop Mode, if a wake-up is detected, it is always signaled by the INT output and in the WK_STAT_1 SPI  
register. It is also signaled by RXDCAN pulled to low. The same applies for the SBC Normal Mode. The  
microcontroller should set the device from SBC Stop Mode to SBC Normal Mode, there is no automatic  
transition to Normal Mode.  
For functional safety reasons, the watchdog will be automatically enabled in SBC Stop Mode after a Bus wake  
event in case it was disabled before (if bit WD_EN_ WK_BUS was configured to HIGH before).  
Wake-Up in SBC Sleep Mode  
Wake-up is possible via a CAN message (filter time t > tWake1). The wake-up automatically transfers the SBC into  
the SBC Restart Mode and from there to Normal Mode the corresponding RXD pin in set to LOW. The  
microcontroller is able to detect the low signal on RXD and to read the wake source out of the WK_STAT_1  
register via SPI. No interrupt is generated when coming out of Sleep Mode. The microcontroller can now for  
example switch the CAN transceiver into CAN Normal Mode via SPI to start communication.  
Table 16  
Action due to CAN Bus Wake-Up  
SBC Mode after Wake  
Normal Mode  
SBC Mode  
Normal Mode  
Stop Mode  
Sleep Mode  
Restart Mode  
VCC1  
INT  
RXD  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
ON  
LOW  
LOW  
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
Stop Mode  
ON  
Restart Mode  
Ramping Up  
ON  
Restart Mode  
Fail-Safe Mode  
Restart Mode  
Ramping up  
10.2.5  
TXD Time-out Feature  
If the TXD signal is dominant for a time t > tTXD_CAN_TO, in CAN Normal Mode, the TXD time-out function  
deactivates the transmission of the signal at the bus. This is implemented to prevent the bus from being  
blocked permanently due to an error. The transmitter is disabled and the transceiver is switched to Receive  
Only Mode. The failure is stored in the SPI flag CAN_FAIL. The CAN transmitter stage is activated again after  
the dominant time-out condition is removed and the transceiver is automatically switched back to CAN  
Normal Mode. The transceiver configuration stays unchanged.  
10.2.6  
Bus Dominant Clamping  
If the HS CAN bus signal is dominant for a time t > tBUS_CAN_TO in CAN Normal and Receive Only Mode a bus  
dominant clamping is detected and the SPI bit CAN_FAIL is set. The transceiver configuration stays  
unchanged.  
10.2.7  
Undervoltage Detection  
The voltage at the CAN supply pin is monitored only in CAN Normal and Receive Only Mode for SBC Normal  
and Stop Mode . In case of VCAN undervoltage a signalization via SPI bit VCAN_UV is triggered and the SBC  
disables the transmitter stage. If the CAN supply reaches a higher level than the undervoltage detection  
threshold (VCAN > VCAN_UV), the transceiver is automatically switched back to CAN Normal Mode. The  
transceiver configuration stays unchanged.  
Datasheet  
71  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
High Speed CAN Transceiver  
10.3  
Electrical Characteristics  
Table 17  
Electrical Characteristics  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; 4.75 V < VCAN < 5.25 V; RL = 60; CAN Normal Mode; all voltages with  
respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin  
(unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Uni Note or  
Number  
t
Test Condition  
Min.  
Max.  
CAN Bus Receiver  
Differential Receiver  
Threshold Voltage,  
recessive to dominant edge  
Vdiff,rd_N  
0.80  
0.90  
V
Vdiff = VCANH - VCANL  
;
P_10.3.2  
-12V VCM(CAN) +12V;  
0.9 V Vdiff,D_Range 8 V;  
CAN Normal Mode  
1)  
Dominant state differential Vdiff_D_range 0.9  
input voltage range  
8.0  
V
V
V
= VCANH - VCANL  
;
P_10.3.59  
P_10.3.3  
diff  
-12V VCM(CAN) +12V;  
CAN Normal Mode  
Differential Receiver  
Threshold Voltage,  
dominant to recessive edge  
Vdiff,dr_N  
0.50  
0.60  
Vdiff = VCANH -VCANL;  
-12V VCM(CAN) +12V;  
-3 V Vdiff,R_Range 0.5 V;  
CAN Normal Mode  
1)  
Recessive state differential Vdiff_R_range -3.0  
input voltage range  
0.5  
V
V
V
= VCANH - VCANL  
;
P_10.3.60  
diff  
-12V VCM(CAN) +12V;  
CAN Normal Mode  
1)  
Common Mode Range  
CMR  
-12  
20  
12  
50  
P_10.3.4  
P_10.3.6  
CANH, CANL Input  
Resistance  
Rin  
40  
kCAN Normal / Wake  
capable Mode;  
Recessive state;  
-2 V VCANL/H +7 V  
Differential Input Resistance Rdiff  
40  
80  
100  
kCAN Normal / Wake  
capable Mode;  
P_10.3.7  
Recessive state;  
-2 V VCANL/H +7 V  
Input Resistance Deviation ΔRi  
between CANH and CANL  
-3  
3
%
pF  
pF  
V
1)Recessive state;  
VCANH = VCANL = 5 V  
P_10.3.38  
P_10.3.39  
P_10.3.40  
2)  
Input Capacitance CANH,  
CANL versus GND  
Cin  
20  
10  
0.8  
40  
20  
1.15  
V
= 5 V  
TXD  
2)  
Differential Input  
Capacitance  
Cdiff  
V
= 5 V  
TXD  
Wake-up Receiver  
Vdiff, rd_W  
-12V VCM(CAN) +12V; P_10.3.8  
1.15 V Vdiff,D_Range 8 V;  
CAN Wake Capable  
Mode  
Threshold Voltage,  
recessive to dominant edge  
Datasheet  
72  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
High Speed CAN Transceiver  
Table 17  
Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; 4.75 V < VCAN < 5.25 V; RL = 60; CAN Normal Mode; all voltages with  
respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin  
(unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Uni Note or  
Number  
t
Test Condition  
Min.  
Max.  
Wake-up Receiver Dominant Vdiff,D_range 1.15  
state differential input  
8.0  
V
1)-12V VCM(CAN) ≤  
+12V;  
P_10.3.61  
_W  
voltage range  
CAN Wake Capable  
Mode  
Wake-up Receiver  
Threshold Voltage,  
dominant to recessive edge  
Vdiff, dr_W  
0.4  
0.7  
V
V
-12V VCM(CAN) +12V; P_10.3.9  
-3 V Vdiff,R_Range 0.4 V;  
CAN Wake Capable  
Mode  
Wake-up Receiver Recessive Vdiff,R_range_ -3.0  
state differential input  
0.4  
1)-12V VCM(CAN) ≤  
+12V;  
P_10.3.62  
W
voltage range  
CAN Wake Capable  
Mode  
CAN Bus Transmitter  
CANH/CANL Recessive  
Output Voltage  
(CAN Normal Mode)  
VCANL/H_NM 2.0  
3.0  
0.1  
50  
V
V
CAN Normal Mode;  
P_10.3.11  
P_10.3.43  
P_10.3.12  
VTXD = VCC1  
;
no load  
CANH/CANL Recessive  
Output Voltage  
(CAN Wake Capable Mode)  
VCANL/H_LP -0.1  
CAN Wake Capable  
Mode; VTXD = VCC1  
;
no load  
CANH, CANL Recessive  
Output Voltage Difference  
Vdiff = VCANH - VCANL  
Vdiff_r_N  
Vdiff_r_W  
VCANL  
-500  
-200  
0.5  
mV CAN Normal Mode  
VTXD = VCC1  
;
no load  
(CAN Normal Mode)  
CANH, CANL Recessive  
Output Voltage Difference  
Vdiff = VCANH - VCANL  
200  
2.25  
4.5  
mV CAN Wake Capable  
Mode;  
P_10.3.41  
P_10.3.13  
P_10.3.14  
P_10.3.16  
V
TXD = VCC1  
no load  
CAN Normal Mode;  
TXD = 0 V;  
VCAN = 5 V  
;
(CAN Wake Capable Mode)  
CANL Dominant Output  
Voltage  
V
V
V
V
;
50Ω ≤ RL 65Ω  
CANH Dominant Output  
Voltage  
VCANH  
2.75  
1.5  
CAN Normal Mode;  
V
V
TXD = 0 V;  
CAN = 5 V;  
50Ω ≤ RL 65Ω  
CANH, CANL Dominant  
Output Voltage Difference  
Vdiff = VCANH - VCANL  
Vdiff_d_N  
2.0  
2.5  
CAN Normal Mode;  
VTXD = 0 V;  
VCAN = 5 V;  
50Ω ≤ RL 65Ω  
Datasheet  
73  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
High Speed CAN Transceiver  
Table 17  
Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; 4.75 V < VCAN < 5.25 V; RL = 60; CAN Normal Mode; all voltages with  
respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin  
(unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Uni Note or  
Number  
t
Test Condition  
1)CAN Normal Mode;  
TXD = 0 V;  
Min.  
Max.  
CANH, CANL Dominant  
Output Voltage Difference  
Vdiff = VCANH - VCANL  
Vdiff_d_N  
1.5  
5.0  
V
P_10.3.55  
V
VCAN = 5 V;  
RL = 2240Ω  
CANH, CANL Dominant  
Output Voltage Difference  
Vdiff = VCANH - VCANL  
Vdiff_d_N  
1.4  
3.3  
70  
V
1)CAN Normal Mode;  
P_10.3.56  
P_10.3.57  
P_10.3.58  
P_10.3.42  
VTXD = 0 V;  
VCAN = 5 V;  
45Ω ≤ RL 70Ω  
CANH, CANL output voltage Vdiff_slope_rd  
difference slope, recessive  
to dominant  
V/us 1)30% to 70% of  
measured differential  
bus voltage,  
CL = 100 pF, RL = 60 Ω  
CANH, CANL output voltage Vdiff_slope_dr  
difference slope, dominant  
to recessive  
70  
V/us 1)70% to 30% of  
measured differential  
bus voltage,  
CL = 100 pF, RL = 60 Ω  
Driver Symmetry  
VSYM = VCANH + VCANL  
VSYM  
4.5  
5.5  
V
3)CAN Normal Mode;  
TXD = 0 V / 5 V;  
VCAN = 5 V;  
SPLIT = 4.7nF;  
RL = 60;  
V
C
CANH Short Circuit Current ICANHsc  
CANL Short Circuit Current ICANLsc  
-115  
50  
-80  
80  
5
-50  
115  
7.5  
mA CAN Normal Mode;  
P_10.3.17  
P_10.3.18  
P_10.3.19  
VCANHshort = -3 V  
mA CAN Normal Mode  
VCANLshort = 18 V  
Leakage Current  
ICANH,lk  
ICANL,lk  
µA VS = VCAN = 0V;  
(unpowered device)  
0V < VCANH,L 5V;  
4)  
R
= 0 / 47 kΩ  
test  
Receiver Output RXD  
HIGH level Output Voltage  
VRXD,H  
VRXD,L  
0.8 ×  
VCC1  
V
V
CAN Normal Mode  
RXD(CAN) = -2 mA;  
CAN Normal Mode  
IRXD(CAN) = 2 mA;  
P_10.3.21  
P_10.3.22  
I
LOW Level Output Voltage  
0.2 ×  
VCC1  
Transmission Input TXD  
HIGH Level Input Voltage  
Threshold  
VTXD,H  
0.7 ×  
VCC1  
V
CAN Normal Mode  
recessive state  
P_10.3.23  
Datasheet  
74  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
High Speed CAN Transceiver  
Table 17  
Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; 4.75 V < VCAN < 5.25 V; RL = 60; CAN Normal Mode; all voltages with  
respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin  
(unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Uni Note or  
Number  
t
Test Condition  
Min.  
Max.  
LOW Level Input Voltage  
Threshold  
VTXD,L  
0.3 ×  
VCC1  
V
CAN Normal Mode  
dominant state  
1)  
P_10.3.24  
P_10.3.25  
TXD Input Hysteresis  
VTXD,hys  
0.08 × 0.12 × 0.5 ×  
V
VCC1  
20  
8
VCC1  
VCC1  
TXD Pull-up Resistance  
RTXD  
40  
80  
kΩ  
P_10.3.26  
P_10.3.27  
CAN Transceiver Enabling  
Time  
tCAN,EN  
13  
18  
µs 5)CSN = HIGH to first  
valid transmitted TXD  
dominant  
Dynamic CAN-Transceiver Characteristics  
Min. Dominant Time for Bus tWake1  
0.50  
1.8  
µs -12V VCM(CAN) +12 V; P_10.3.28  
Wake-up  
CAN Wake capable  
Mode  
Wake-up Time-out,  
Recessive Bus  
tWake2  
0.8  
10  
ms 5)CAN Wake capable  
Mode  
µs 5)6)7) Wake-up reaction P_10.3.44  
time after a valid WUP  
P_10.3.29  
WUP Wake-up  
Reaction Time  
tWU_WUP  
100  
on CAN bus;  
Loop delay  
tLOOP,f  
150  
150  
255  
255  
ns 3)CAN Normal Mode  
CL = 100 pF;  
P_10.3.30  
(recessive to dominant)  
RL = 60 ;  
VCAN = 5 V;  
CRXD = 15 pF  
Loop delay  
tLOOP,r  
ns 3)CAN Normal Mode  
CL = 100 pF;  
P_10.3.31  
(dominant to recessive)  
RL = 60 ;  
VCAN = 5 V;  
CRXD = 15 pF  
Propagation Delay  
TXD LOW to bus dominant  
td(L),T  
td(H),T  
td(L),R  
50  
ns CAN Normal Mode  
CL = 100pF;  
P_10.3.32  
P_10.3.33  
P_10.3.34  
50Ω ≤ RL 65;  
VCAN = 5 V;  
Propagation Delay  
TXD HIGH to bus recessive  
50  
ns CAN Normal Mode  
CL = 100 pF;  
50Ω ≤ RL 65;  
VCAN = 5 V;  
Propagation Delay  
bus dominant to RXD LOW  
100  
ns CAN Normal Mode  
CL = 100pF;  
50Ω ≤ RL 60;  
VCAN = 5 V;  
CRXD = 15 pF  
Datasheet  
75  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
High Speed CAN Transceiver  
Table 17  
Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; 4.75 V < VCAN < 5.25 V; RL = 60; CAN Normal Mode; all voltages with  
respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin  
(unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
100  
Uni Note or  
Number  
t
Test Condition  
Min.  
Max.  
Propagation Delay  
bus recessive to RXD HIGH  
td(H),R  
ns CAN Normal Mode  
CL = 100pF;  
P_10.3.35  
50Ω ≤ RL 60;  
VCAN = 5 V;  
CRXD = 15 pF  
Received Recessive Bit  
Width  
(CAN FD up to 2Mbps)  
tbit(RXD)  
400  
435  
-65  
550  
530  
40  
ns CAN Normal Mode  
CL = 100pF;  
P_10.3.46  
P_10.3.47  
P_10.3.48  
P_10.3.52  
RL = 60 ;  
VCAN = 5 V;  
CRXD = 15 pF;  
tbit(TXD) = 500ns;  
Timing definition  
according to Figure 31  
TransmittedRecessive Bit  
Width  
(CAN FD up to 2Mbps)  
tbit(BUS)  
ns CAN Normal Mode  
CL = 100pF;  
RL = 60 ;  
VCAN = 5 V;  
CRXD = 15 pF;  
tbit(TXD) = 500ns;  
Timing definition  
according to Figure 31  
Receiver Timing Symmetry tRec  
(CAN FD up to 2Mbps)  
ns CAN Normal Mode  
CL = 100pF;  
RL = 60 ;  
VCAN = 5 V;  
CRXD = 15 pF;  
tbit(TXD) = 500ns;  
Timing definition  
according to Figure 31  
Received Recessive Bit  
Width  
tbit(RXD)  
120  
220  
ns CAN Normal Mode;  
CL = 100pF;  
(CAN FD up to 5 Mbps)  
RL = 60 ;  
V
CAN = 5 V;  
CRXD = 15 pF;  
bit(TXD) = 200 ns;  
t
Parameter definition in  
according to  
Figure 31.  
Datasheet  
76  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
High Speed CAN Transceiver  
Table 17  
Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; 4.75 V < VCAN < 5.25 V; RL = 60; CAN Normal Mode; all voltages with  
respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin  
(unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Uni Note or  
Number  
t
Test Condition  
Min.  
Max.  
Transmitted Recessive Bit  
Width  
tbit(BUS)  
155  
210  
ns CAN Normal Mode;  
CL = 100pF;  
P_10.3.53  
(CAN FD up to 5 Mbps)  
RL = 60 ;  
VCAN = 5 V;  
CRXD = 15 pF;  
tbit(TXD) = 200 ns;  
Parameter definition in  
according to  
Figure 31.  
Receiver Timing Symmetry tRec  
(CAN FD up to 5 Mbps)  
-45  
15  
ns CAN Normal Mode;  
CL = 100pF;  
P_10.3.54  
RL = 60 ;  
V
CAN = 5 V;  
CRXD = 15 pF;  
bit(TXD) = 200 ns;  
t
Parameter definition in  
according to  
Figure 31.  
TXD Permanent Dominant tTxD_CAN_TO 1.6  
Time-out  
2
2
2.4  
2.4  
ms 5)CAN Normal Mode  
P_10.3.36  
P_10.3.37  
BUS Permanent Dominant tBUS_CAN_TO 1.6  
ms 5)CAN Normal Mode  
Time-out  
5)  
Timeout for bus inactivity  
Bus Bias reaction time  
tSILENCE  
tBias  
0.6  
1.2  
s
P_10.3.50  
P_10.3.51  
5)  
200  
µs  
1) Not subject to production test, specified by design.  
2) Not subject to production test, specified by design, S2P - Method; f = 10 MHz.  
3) VSYM shall be observed during dominant and recessive state and also during the transition dominant to recessive and  
vice versa while TXD is simulated by a square signal (50% duty cycle) with a frequency of up to 1 MHz (2 MBit/s).  
4) Rtest between supply (VS / VCAN) and 0V (GND).  
5) Not subject to production test, tolerance defined by internal oscillator tolerance.  
6) Wake-up is signalized via INT pin activation in SBC Stop Mode and via VCC1 ramping up with wake from SBC Sleep  
Mode.  
7) Time starts with end of last dominant phase of WUP.  
Datasheet  
77  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
High Speed CAN Transceiver  
V
TXDCAN  
Vcc1  
GND  
t
t
VDIFF  
td(L),T  
td(H),T  
V diff, rd_N  
Vdiff, dr_N  
t d(L),R  
t d(H),R  
tLOOP,f  
tLOOP,r  
VRXDCAN  
V
cc1  
0.8 x Vcc1  
0.2 x Vcc1  
GND  
t
Figure 30 Timing Diagrams for Dynamic Characteristics  
70%  
TXDCAN  
30%  
tLoop_f  
5x tBit(TXD)  
tBit(TXD)  
Vdiff=CANH-CANL  
900mV  
tBit(Bus)  
500mV  
70%  
RXDCAN  
30%  
tLoop_r  
Figure 31 From ISO 11898-2: tloop, tbit(TXD), tbit(Bus), tbit(RXD) definitions  
tBit(RXD)  
Datasheet  
78  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
LIN Transceiver  
11  
LIN Transceiver  
11.1  
Block Description  
VSHS  
SPI Mode Control  
VCC1  
Driver  
TxD Input  
Temp.-  
Protection  
Current  
RTxD  
RBUS  
Output  
Stage  
TXDLIN  
Timeout  
Limit  
LIN  
To SPI Diagnostic  
Receiver  
VCC1  
Filter  
VSHS  
RXDLIN  
Wake  
Receiver  
Figure 32 Block Diagram  
11.1.1  
LIN Specifications  
The LIN network is standardized by international regulations.  
The device is compliant to the physical layer standard LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4 and SAE J2602-2. The SAE J2602-2  
standard differs from the LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4 standard mainly by the lower data rate (10.4 kbit/s).  
Datasheet  
79  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
LIN Transceiver  
11.2  
Functional Description  
The LIN Bus is a single wire, bi-directional bus, used for in-vehicle networks. The LIN transceivers implemented  
inside the TLE9262BQX are the interface between the micro controller and the physical LIN Bus. The digital  
output data from the micro controller are driven to the LIN bus via the TXD input pin on the TLE9262BQX. The  
transmit data stream on the TXD input is converted to a LIN bus signal with optimized slew rate to minimize  
the EME level of the LIN network. The RXD output sends back the information from the LIN bus to the micro  
controller. The receiver has an integrated filter network to suppress noise on the LIN Bus and to increase the  
EMI (Electro Magnetic Immunity) level of the transceiver.  
Two logical states are possible on the LIN Bus according to LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4.  
Every LIN network consists of a master node and one or more slave nodes. To configure the TLE9262BQX for  
master node applications, a resistor in the range of 1 kand a reverse diode must be connected between the  
LIN bus and the power supply VSHS.  
The different transceiver modes can be controlled via the SPI LIN1 bits.  
Figure 33 shows the possible transceiver mode transitions when changing the SBC mode.  
SBC Mode  
LIN Transceiver Mode  
SBC Stop Mode  
Receive Only Wake Capable Normal Mode  
OFF  
OFF  
SBC Normal Mode  
SBC Sleep Mode  
SBC Restart Mode  
SBC Fail-Safe Mode  
Receive Only Wake Capable Normal Mode  
Wake Capable  
OFF  
OFF  
Woken1  
Wake Capable  
1after a wake event on LIN Bus  
Behavior after SBC Restart Mode - not coming from SBC Sleep Mode due to a wake up of the respective transceive:r  
If the transceivers had been configured to Normal Mode, or Receive Only Mode, then the mode will be changed to Wake  
Capable. If it was Wake Capable, then it will remainWake Capable. If it had been OFF before SBC Restart Mode, then it  
will remain OFF.  
Behavior in SBC Development Mode:  
LIN default value in SBC INIT MODE and entering SBC Normal Mode from SBC Init Mode is ON instead of OFF.  
Figure 33 LIN Mode Control Diagram  
11.2.1  
LIN OFF Mode  
The LIN OFF Mode is the default mode after power-up of the SBC. It is available in all SBC Modes and is  
intended to completely stop LIN activities or when LIN communication is not needed. In LIN OFF Mode, a  
wake-up event on the bus will be ignored.  
Datasheet  
80  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
LIN Transceiver  
11.2.2  
LIN Normal Mode  
The LIN Transceiver is enabled via SPI in SBC Normal Mode. LIN Normal Mode is designed for normal data  
transmission/reception within the LIN network. The Mode is available in SBC Normal Mode and in SBC Stop  
Mode.  
Transmission  
The signal from the microcontroller is applied to the TXDLIN input of the SBC. The bus driver switches the  
LIN output stage to transfer this input signal to the LIN bus line.  
Enabling Sequence  
The LIN transceiver requires an enabling time tLIN,EN before a message can be sent on the bus. This means that  
the TXDLIN signal can only be pulled LOW after the enabling time. If this is not ensured, then the TXDLIN needs  
to be set back to high (=recessive) until the enabling time is completed.  
Only the next dominant bit will be transmitted on the bus.  
Figure 34 shows different scenarios and explanations for LIN enabling.  
VTXDLIN  
t
LIN  
Mode  
t LIN ,EN  
t LIN,EN  
t LIN,EN  
LIN  
NORMAL  
LIN OFF  
t
t
V
LIN_BUS  
Recessive  
Dominant  
recessive TXD level  
required before start of  
transmission  
Correct sequence ,  
Bus is enabled after tLIN, EN  
tLIN, EN not ensured , no  
transmission on bus  
tLIN, not ensured ,  
no transmission on bus  
recessive TXD  
level required  
EN  
Figure 34 LIN Transceiver Enabling Sequence  
Reduced Electromagnetic Emission  
To reduce electromagnetic emissions (EME), the bus driver controls LIN slopes symmetrically. The  
configuration of the different slopes is described in Chapter 11.2.8.  
Reception  
Analog LIN bus signals are converted into digital signals at RXD via the differential input receiver.  
11.2.3  
LIN Receive Only Mode  
In LIN Receive Only Mode (RXD only), the driver stage is de-activated but reception is still possible. This mode  
is accessible by an SPI command and is available in SBC Normal and SBC Stop Mode.  
11.2.4  
LIN Wake Capable Mode  
This mode can be used in SBC Stop, Sleep, Restart and Normal Mode by programming via SPI and it is used to  
monitor bus activities. It is automatically accessed in SBC Fail-Safe Mode. A wake up is detected, if a recessive  
Datasheet  
81  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
LIN Transceiver  
to dominant transition on the LIN bus is followed by a dominant level of longer than tWK,Bus, followed by a  
dominant to recessive transition. The dominant to recessive transition will cause a wake up of the LIN  
transceiver. A wake-up results in a different behavior of the SBC, as described in below Table 18. As a  
signalization to the microcontroller, the RXD_LIN pin is set LOW and will stay LOW until the LIN transceiver is  
changed to any other mode. After a wake-up event the transceiver can be switched to LIN Normal Mode for  
communication.  
Rearming the transceiver for wake capability  
After a BUS wake-up event, the transceiver is woken. However, the LIN1 transceiver mode bits will still show  
wake capable (=‘01’) so that the RXD signal will be pulled low. There are two possibilities how the LIN  
transceiver’s wake capable mode is enabled again after a wake event:  
The LIN transceiver mode must be toggled, i.e. switched to LIN Normal Mode, LIN Receive Only Mode or LIN  
Off, before switching to LIN Wake Capable Mode again.  
Rearming is done automatically when the SBC is changed to SBC Stop, SBC Sleep, or SBC Fail-Safe Mode  
to ensure wake-up capability.  
Wake-Up in SBC Stop and SBC Normal Mode  
In SBC Stop Mode, if a wake-up is detected, it is signaled by the INT output and in the WK_STAT_1 SPI register.  
It is also signaled by RXDLIN put to LOW. The same applies for the SBC Normal Mode. The microcontroller  
should set the device to SBC Normal Mode, there is no automatic transition to Normal Mode.  
For functional safety reasons, the watchdog will be automatically enabled in SBC Stop Mode after a Bus wake  
event in case it was disabled before (if bit WD_EN_ WK_BUS was configured to HIGH before).  
Wake-Up in SBC Sleep Mode  
Wake-up is possible via a LIN message (filter time t > tWK,Bus). The wake-up automatically transfers the SBC into  
the SBC Restart Mode and from there to Normal Mode the corresponding RXD pin in set to LOW. The  
microcontroller is able to detect the low signal on RXD and to read the wake source out of the WK_STAT_1  
register via SPI. No interrupt is generated when coming out of Sleep Mode. The microcontroller can now  
switch the LIN transceiver into LIN Normal Mode via SPI to start communication.  
Table 18  
Action due to a LIN BUS Wake-up  
SBC Mode after Wake  
Normal Mode  
SBC Mode  
Normal Mode  
Stop Mode  
Sleep Mode  
Restart Mode  
VCC1  
INT  
RXD  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
ON  
LOW  
LOW  
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
Stop Mode  
ON  
Restart Mode  
Ramping Up  
ON  
Restart Mode  
Fail-Safe Mode  
Restart Mode  
Ramping up  
11.2.5  
TXD Time-out Feature  
If the TXD signal is dominant for the time t >tTxD_LIN _TO, the TXD time-out function deactivates the LIN  
transmitter output stage temporarily. The transceiver remains in recessive state. The TXD time-out functions  
prevents the LIN bus from being blocked by a permanent LOW signal on the TXD pin, caused by a failure. The  
failure is stored in the SPI flag LIN1_FAIL . The LIN transmitter stage is activated again after the dominant  
time-out condition is removed. The transceiver configuration stays unchanged.  
Datasheet  
82  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
LIN Transceiver  
Recovery of the  
microcontroller error  
TxD Time-Out due to  
microcontroller error  
Release after TxD  
Time-out  
Normal Communication  
ttimeout  
ttorec  
Normal Communication  
TxD  
LIN  
t
t
Figure 35 TXD Time-Out Function  
11.2.6  
Bus Dominant Clamping  
If the LIN bus signal is dominant for a time t > tBUS_LIN_TO in LIN Normal and Receive Only Mode, then a bus  
dominant clamping is detected and the SPI bit LIN1_FAIL is set. The transceiver configuration stays  
unchanged.  
11.2.7  
Undervoltage Detection  
In case the supply voltage is dropping below the VSHS undervoltage detection threshold (VSHS < VSHS,UVD), the  
TLE9262BQX disables the output and receiver stages. If the power supply reaches a higher level than the  
undervoltage detection threshold (VSHS > VSHS,UVD), the TLE9262BQX continues with normal operation. The  
transceiver configuration stays unchanged.  
11.2.8  
Slope Selection  
The LIN transceiver offers a LIN Low-Slope Mode for 10.4 kBaud communication and a LIN Normal-Slope Mode  
for 20 kBaud communication. The only difference is the behavior of the transmitter. In LIN Low-Slope Mode,  
the  
transmitter uses a lower slew rate to further reduce the EME compared to Normal-Slope Mode. This complies  
with SAE J2602 requirements.By default, the device works in LIN Normal-Slope Mode. The selection of LIN  
Low-Slope Mode is done by an SPI bit LIN_LSM and will become effective as soon as CSN goes ‘HIGH’. Only the  
LIN Slope is changed. The selection is accessible in SBC Normal Mode only.  
11.2.9  
Flash Programming via LIN  
The device allows LIN flash programming, e.g. of another LIN Slave with a communication of up to 115 kBaud.  
This feature is enabled by de-activating the slope control mechanism via a SPI command (bit LIN_FLASH) and  
will become effective as soon as CSN goes ‘HIGH’. The SPI bit can be set in SBC Normal Mode.  
Datasheet  
83  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
LIN Transceiver  
Note:  
It is recommended to perform flash programming only at nominal supply voltage VSHS = 13.5V to  
ensure stable data communication.  
Datasheet  
84  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
LIN Transceiver  
11.3  
Electrical Characteristics  
Table 19  
Electrical Characteristics  
VSHS = 5.5 V to 18 V, Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C, RL = 500 , all voltages with respect to ground, positive current  
flowing into pin (unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Unit Note or Test Condition  
Number  
Min. Typ. Max.  
Receiver Output (RXD pin)  
HIGH Level Output Voltage  
VRXD,H  
VRXD,L  
0.8 ×  
VCC1  
V
V
IRXD = -1.6 mA;  
Bus = VSHS  
IRXD = 1.6 mA  
Bus = 0 V  
P_11.3.1  
P_11.3.2  
V
LOW Level Output Voltage  
0.2 ×  
VCC1  
V
Transmission Input (TXD pin)  
HIGH Level Input Voltage  
VTXD,H  
0.7 ×  
VCC1  
V
V
V
Recessive State  
P_11.3.3  
P_11.3.4  
P_11.3.5  
P_11.3.6  
1)  
TXD Input Hysteresis  
VTXD,hys 0.08 × 0.12 × 0.5 ×  
VCC1  
VCC1  
VCC1  
LOW Level Input Voltage  
VTXD,L  
RTXD  
0.3 ×  
VCC1  
Dominant State  
TXD Pull-up Resistance  
20  
40  
80  
kVTXD = 0 V  
LIN Bus Receiver (LIN Pin)  
Receiver Threshold Voltage, VBus,rd  
Recessive to Dominant Edge  
0.4 × 0.45 × –  
V
P_11.3.7  
P_11.3.8  
VSHS  
VSHS  
Receiver Dominant State  
VBus,dom  
0.4 ×  
V
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
VSHS  
Param 17  
Receiver Threshold Voltage, VBus,dr  
Dominant to Recessive Edge  
0.55 × 0.60 × V  
P_11.3.9  
P_11.3.10  
P_11.3.11  
VSHS  
VSHS  
Receiver Recessive State  
Receiver Center Voltage  
VBus,rec  
VBus,c  
0.6 ×  
VSHS  
V
V
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Param 18  
0.475 0.5 × 0.525  
× VSHS VSHS × VSHS  
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Param 19  
6 V < VSHS < 18 V  
Receiver Hysteresis  
VBus,hys  
0.07 × 0.1 × 0.175  
VSHS VSHS × VSHS  
V
Vbus,hys = Vbus,dr - Vbus,rd  
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Param 20  
P_11.3.12  
Wake-up Threshold Voltage VBus,wk  
0.40 × 0.5 × 0.6 ×  
V
P_11.3.13  
P_11.3.14  
VSHS  
VSHS  
VSHS  
2)  
Dominant Time for Bus  
Wake-up  
tWK,Bus  
30  
150  
µs  
Datasheet  
85  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
LIN Transceiver  
Table 19  
Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)  
VSHS = 5.5 V to 18 V, Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C, RL = 500 , all voltages with respect to ground, positive current  
flowing into pin (unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Unit Note or Test Condition  
Number  
Min. Typ. Max.  
LIN Bus Transmitter (LIN Pin)  
1)  
Bus Serial Diode Voltage  
Drop  
Vserdiode 0.4  
0.7  
1.0  
V
V
= VCC1;  
P_11.3.15  
TXD  
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Param 21  
Bus Recessive Output  
Voltage  
VBUS,ro  
0.8 ×  
VSHS  
VSHS  
V
VTXD = HIGH Level  
P_11.3.16  
P_11.3.17  
Bus Short Circuit Current  
IBUS,sc  
40  
100  
150  
mA VBUS = 18 V;  
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Param 12  
Leakage Current  
Loss of Ground  
IBUS,lk1  
-1000 -450 20  
µA VSHS = 12 V = GND;  
0 V < VBUS < 18 V;  
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Param 15  
P_11.3.18  
P_11.3.19  
P_11.3.20  
P_11.3.21  
P_11.3.22  
Leakage Current  
Loss of Battery  
IBUS,lk2  
IBUS,lk3  
IBUS,lk4  
20  
µA VSHS = 0 V;  
V
BUS = 18 V;  
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Param 16  
Leakage Current  
Driver Off  
-1  
mA VSHS = 18 V;  
BUS = 0 V;  
V
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Param 13  
Leakage Current  
Driver Off  
20  
47  
µA VSHS = 8 V;  
VBUS = 18 V;  
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Param 14  
Bus Pull-up Resistance  
RBUS  
20  
30  
kNormal Mode  
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Param 26  
1)  
LIN Input Capacitance  
CBUS  
20  
1
25  
6
pF  
P_11.3.23  
P_11.3.24  
Receiver propagation delay td(L),R  
bus dominant to RXD LOW  
µs VCC = 5 V;  
CRXD = 20 pF;  
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Param 31  
Receiver propagation delay td(H),R  
bus recessive to RXD HIGH  
1
6
2
µs VCC = 5 V;  
RXD = 20 pF;  
P_11.3.25  
P_11.3.26  
C
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Param 31  
Receiver delay symmetry  
tsym,R  
-2  
µs tsym,R = td(L),R - td(H),R;  
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Param 32  
Datasheet  
86  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
LIN Transceiver  
Table 19  
Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)  
VSHS = 5.5 V to 18 V, Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C, RL = 500 , all voltages with respect to ground, positive current  
flowing into pin (unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Unit Note or Test Condition  
Number  
Min. Typ. Max.  
LIN Transceiver Enabling  
Time  
tLIN,EN  
8
13  
20  
20  
10  
18  
24  
24  
14  
µs 2)CSN = HIGH to first valid P_11.3.27  
transmitted TXD dominant  
1)2)  
Bus Dominant Time Out  
tBUS_LIN 16  
ms  
ms  
µs  
P_11.3.28  
P_11.3.29  
P_11.3.30  
_TO  
1)2)  
TXD Dominant Time Out  
tTxD_LIN  
16  
V
= 0 V  
TXD  
_TO  
1)2)  
TXD Dominant Time Out  
Recovery Time  
ttorec  
5
Duty Cycle D1  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
0.396  
3) THRec(max) = 0.744 × VSHS; P_11.3.31  
THDom(max) = 0.581 × VSHS  
SHS = 7.0 … 18 V;  
(For worst case at 20 kbit/s)  
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4 Normal  
Slope  
;
V
tbit = 50 µs;  
D1 = tbus_rec(min)/2 tbit  
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Param 27  
;
Duty Cycle D2  
0.581  
3)THRec(min.) = 0.422 × VSHS; P_11.3.32  
THDom(min.) = 0.284 × VSHS  
SHS = 7.6 … 18 V;  
bit = 50 µs;  
(for worst case at 20 kbit/s)  
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4 Normal  
Slope  
;
V
t
D2 = tbus_rec(max)/2 tbit  
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Param 28  
;
Duty Cycle D3  
(for worst case at 10.4 kbit/s)  
SAE J2602 Low Slope  
0.417  
3)THRec(max) = 0.778 × VSHS P_11.3.33  
THDom(max) = 0.616 × VSHS  
;
VSHS = 7.0 … 18 V;  
t
bit = 96 µs;  
D3 = tbus_rec(min)/2 tbit  
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Param 29  
;
Duty Cycle D4  
0.590  
3)THRec(min.) = 0.389 × VSHS; P_11.3.34  
(for worst case at 10.4 kbit/s)  
SAE J2602 Low Slope  
THDom(min.) = 0.251 × VSHS  
VSHS = 7.6 … 18 V;  
;
t
bit = 96 µs;  
D4 = tbus_rec(max)/2 tbit  
LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4  
Param 30  
;
1) Not subject to production test, specified by design.  
2) Not subject to production test, tolerance defined by internal oscillator tolerance  
3) Bus load conditions concerning LIN 2.2/ISO 17987-4 CLIN, RLIN = 1 nF, 1 k/ 6.8 nF, 660 / 10 nF, 500 Ω  
Datasheet  
87  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
LIN Transceiver  
VSHS  
TxD  
RxD  
100 nF  
RLIN  
CRxD  
WK  
LIN  
GND  
CLIN  
Figure 36 Simplified Test Circuit for Dynamic Characteristics  
Datasheet  
88  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
LIN Transceiver  
tBit  
tBit  
tBit  
TxD  
(input to  
transmitting node )  
tBus _dom (max )  
tBus_rec (min)  
Thresholds of  
receiving node 1  
THRec (max)  
THDom (max)  
VSUP  
(Transceiver supply  
of transmitting  
node )  
Thresholds of  
receiving node 2  
THRec(min)  
THDom(min)  
tBus _dom (min)  
tBus_rec(max )  
RxD  
(output of receiving  
node 1)  
td(L),R (1)  
td(H),R(1)  
RxD  
(output of receiving  
node 2)  
t(L),R(2)  
td(H),r(2)  
Duty Cycle1 = tBUS_rec(min) / (2 x t  
)
BIT  
Duty Cycle2 = tBUS_rec(max ) / (2 x tBIT  
)
Figure 37 Timing Diagram for Dynamic Characteristics  
Datasheet  
89  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Wake and Voltage Monitoring Inputs  
12  
Wake and Voltage Monitoring Inputs  
12.1  
Block Description  
Internal Supply  
IPU_WK  
WKx  
+
-
tWK  
IPD_WK  
VRef  
Logic  
MONx_Input_Circuit_ext.vsd  
Figure 38 Wake Input Block Diagram  
Features  
Three High-Voltage inputs with a 3V (typ.) threshold voltage  
Alternate Measurement function for high-voltage sensing via WK1 and WK2  
Wake-up capability for power saving modes  
Edge sensitive wake feature LOW to HIGH and HIGH to LOW  
Pull-up and Pull-down current sources, configurable via SPI  
Selectable configuration for static sense or cyclic sense working with TIMER1, TIMER2  
In SBC Normal and SBC Stop Mode the level of the WK pin can be read via SPI even if the respective WK is  
not enabled as a wake source.  
Datasheet  
90  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Wake and Voltage Monitoring Inputs  
12.2  
Functional Description  
The wake input pins are edge-sensitive inputs with a switching threshold of typically 3V. This means that both  
transitions, HIGH to LOW and LOW to HIGH, result in a signalization by the SBC. The signalization occurs either  
in triggering the interrupt in SBC Normal Mode and SBC Stop Mode or by a wake up of the device in SBC Sleep  
and SBC Fail-Safe Mode.  
Two different wake detection modes can be selected via SPI:  
Static sense: WK inputs are always active  
Cyclic sense: WK inputs are only active for a certain time period (see Chapter 5.2.1)  
Two different filter times of 16µs or 64µs can be selected to avoid a parasitic wake-up due to transients or EMC  
disturbances in static sense configuration.  
The filter time (tFWK1, tFWK2) is triggered by a level change crossing the switching threshold and a wake signal is  
recognized if the input level will not cross again the threshold during the selected filter time.  
Figure 39 shows a typical wake-up timing and parasitic filter.  
VWK  
VWK,th  
VWK,th  
t
t
VINT  
tWK,f  
tWK,f  
tINT  
No Wake Event  
Wake Event  
Figure 39 Wake-up Filter Timing for Static Sense  
The wake-up capability for each WK pin can be enabled or disabled via SPI command in the WK_CTRL_2  
register.  
The wake source for a wake via a WKx pin can always be read in the register WK_STAT_1 at the bits WK1_WU,  
WK2_WU, and WK3_WU.  
The actual voltage level of the WK pin (LOW or HIGH) can always be read in SBC Normal and SBC Stop Mode in  
the register WK_LVL_STAT. During Cyclic Sense, the register show the sampled levels of the respective WK pin.  
If FO2...3 are configured as WK inputs in its alternative function (16µs static filter time), then the wake events  
will be signalled in the register WK_STAT_2.  
Datasheet  
91  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Wake and Voltage Monitoring Inputs  
12.2.1  
Wake Input Configuration  
To ensure a defined and stable voltage levels at the internal comparator input it is possible to configure  
integrated current sources via the SPI register WK_PUPD_CTRL. In addition, the wake detection modes  
(including the filter time) can be configured via the SPI register WK_FLT_CTRL. An example illustration for the  
automatic switching configuration is shown in Figure 40.  
Table 20  
Pull-Up / Pull-Down Resistor  
WKx_PUPD_1 WKx_PUPD_0 Current Sources Note  
0
0
no current  
source  
WKx input is floating if left open (default setting)  
0
1
1
1
0
1
pull-down  
pull-up  
WKx input internally pulled to GND  
WKx input internally pulled to internal 5V supply  
Automatic  
switching  
If a high level is detected at the WKx input the pull-up  
source is activated, if low level is detected the pull down  
is activated.  
Note:  
If there is no pull-up or pull-down configured on the WK input, then the respective input should be  
tied to GND or VS on board to avoid unintended floating of the pin and subsequent wake events.  
IWKth_min  
IWKth_max  
IWK  
VWKth  
Figure 40 Illustration for Pull-Up / Down Current Sources with Automatic Switching Configuration  
Table 21  
Wake Detection Configuration and Filter Time  
WKx_FLT_1 WKx_FLT_0 Filter Time  
Description  
0
0
1
0
1
0
Config A  
Config B  
Config C  
static sense, 16µs filter time  
static sense, 64µs filter time  
Cyclic sense, Timer 1, 16µs filter time. Period, On-time  
configurable in register TIMER1_CTRL  
1
1
Config D  
Cyclic sense, Timer 2, 16µs filter time. Period, On-time  
configurable in register TIMER2_CTRL  
Config A and B are intended for static sense with two different filter times.  
Datasheet  
92  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Wake and Voltage Monitoring Inputs  
Config C or D are intended for cyclic sense configuration. With the filter settings, the respective timer needs to  
be assigned to one or more HS output, which supplies an external circuit connected to the WKx pin, e.g. HS1  
controlled by Timer 2 (HS1 = 010) and connected to WK3 via an switch circuitry - see also Chapter 5.2.  
Datasheet  
93  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Wake and Voltage Monitoring Inputs  
12.2.2  
Alternate Measurement Function with WK1 and WK2  
12.2.2.1 Block Description  
This function provides the possibility to measure a voltage, e.g. the unbuffered battery voltage, with the  
protected WK1 HV-input. The measured voltage is routed out at WK2. It allows for example a voltage  
compensation for LED lighting by changing the duty cycle of the High-Side outputs. A simple voltage divider  
needs to be placed externally to provide the correct voltage level to the microcontroller A/D converter input.  
The function is available in SBC Normal Mode and it is disabled in all other modes to allow a low-quiescent  
current operation.The measurement function can be used instead of the WK1 and WK2 wake and level  
signalling capability.  
The benefits of the function is that the signal is measured by a HV-input pin and that there is no current flowing  
through the resistor divider during low-power modes.  
The functionality is shown in a simplified application diagram in Figure 60.  
12.2.2.2 Functional Description  
This measurement function is by default disabled. In this case, WK1 and WK2 have the regular wake and  
voltage level signalization functionality. The switch S1 is open for this configuration (see Figure 60).  
The measurement function can be enabled via the SPI bit WK_MEAS.  
If WK_MEAS is set to ‘1’, then the measurement function is enabled and switch S1 is closed in SBC Normal  
Mode. S1 is open in all other SBC modes. If this function the pull-up and down currents of WK1 and WK2 are  
disabled, and the internal WK1 and WK2 signals are gated. In addition, the settings for WK1 and WK2 in the  
registers WK_PUPD_CTRL, WK_FLT_CTRL and WK_CTRL_2 are ignored but changing these setting is not  
prevented. The registers WK_STAT_1 and WK_LVL_STAT are not updated with respect to the inputs WK1 and  
WK2.  
However, if only WK1 or WK2 are set as wake sources and a SBC Sleep Mode command is set, then the SPI_FAIL  
flag will be set and the SBC will be changed into SBC Restart Mode (see Chapter 5.1 also for wake capability  
of WK1 and WK2).  
Table 22  
Differences between Normal WK Function and Measurement Function  
Affected Settings/Modules WK_MEAS = 0  
for WK1 and WK2 Inputs  
WK_MEAS = 1  
S1 configuration  
‘open’  
‘closed’ in SBC Normal Mode,  
‘open’ in all other SBC Modes  
Internal WK1 & WK2 signal  
processing  
Default wake and level signaling  
‘WK1...2 inputs are gated internally,  
function, WK_STAT_1, WK_STAT_2 WK_STAT_1, WK_STAT_2 are not  
are updated accordingly updated  
Wake-up via WK1 and WK2 possible if setting the bits is ignored and not  
WK1_EN, WK2_EN  
bits are set  
prevented. If only WK1_EN, WK2_EN  
are set while trying to go to SBC Sleep  
Mode, then the SPI_FAIL flag will be  
set and the SBC will be changed into  
SBC Restart Mode.  
WK_PUPD_CTRL  
WK_FLT_CTRL  
normal configuration is possible  
normal configuration is possible  
no pull-up or pull-down enabled  
setting the bits is ignored and not  
prevented  
Datasheet  
94  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Wake and Voltage Monitoring Inputs  
Note:  
There is a diode in series to the switch S1 (not shown in the Figure 60), which will influence the  
temperature behavior of the switch.  
Electrical Characteristics  
Electrical Characteristics  
12.3  
Table 23  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; all voltages with respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin  
(unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
WK1...WK3 Input Pin Characteristics  
Max.  
Wake-up/monitoring VWKth  
threshold voltage  
2
3
4
V
without external  
serial resistor RS (with  
RS:  
P_12.3.1  
ΔV = IPD/PU * RS);  
hysteresis included  
Threshold hysteresis  
VWKNth,hys 0.1  
-
0.7  
V
without external  
serial resistor RS (with  
RS:  
P_12.3.2  
ΔV = IPD/PU * RS);  
WK pin Pull-up Current IPU_WK  
-20  
3
-10  
10  
-3  
µA  
µA  
VWK_IN = 4V  
VWK_IN = 2V  
P_12.3.3  
P_12.3.4  
WK pin Pull-down  
Current  
IPD_WK  
20  
Input leakage current ILK,l  
-2  
2
µA  
0 V < VWK_IN < 40V  
P_12.3.5  
Drop Voltage across S1 VDrop,S1  
switch  
1000  
1100  
mV 1)Drop Voltage  
between WK1 and  
WK2 when enabled  
for voltage  
P_12.3.13  
measurement; IWK1  
500µA;  
=
Tj = 25°C  
Refer to Figure 41  
Timing  
Wake-up filter time 1 tFWK1  
12  
50  
16  
64  
20  
80  
µs  
µs  
2)SPI Setting  
2)SPI Setting  
P_12.3.6  
P_12.3.7  
Wake-up filter time 2 tFWK2  
1) Not subject to production test; specified by design  
2) Not subject to production test, tolerance defined by internal oscillator tolerance  
Datasheet  
95  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Wake and Voltage Monitoring Inputs  
1100  
1000  
900  
800  
700  
600  
500  
VS = 13.5V  
500 μA  
250 μA  
100 μA  
50 μA  
ꢁ50  
0
50  
100  
150  
Tjꢀꢀꢀꢁ JUNCTIONꢀTEMPERATUREꢀ(°C)  
Figure 41 Typical Drop Voltage Characteristics of S1 (between WK1 & WK2)  
Datasheet  
96  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Interrupt Function  
13  
Interrupt Function  
13.1  
Block and Functional Description  
Vcc1  
INT  
Time  
out  
Interrupt logic  
Figure 42 Interrupt Block Diagram  
The interrupt is used to signalize special events in real time to the microcontroller. The interrupt block is  
designed as a push/pull output stage as shown in Figure 42. An interrupt is triggered and the INT pin is pulled  
low (active low) for tINT in SBC Normal and Stop Mode and it is released again once tINT is expired. The minimum  
HIGH-time of INT between two consecutive interrupts is tINTD. An interrupt does not cause a SBC mode change.  
Two different interrupt classes could be selected via the SPI bit INT_ GLOBAL:  
Class 1 (wake interrupt - INT_ GLOBAL=0): all wake-up events stored in the wake status SPI register  
(WK_STAT_1 and WK_STAT_2) cause an interrupt (default setting). An interrupt is only triggered if the  
respective function is also enabled as a wake source (including GPIOx if configured as a wake input).  
Class 2 (global interrupt - INT_ GLOBAL=1): in addition to the wake-up events, all signalled failures stored  
in the other status registers cause an interrupt (the register WK_LVL_STAT is not generating interrupts)  
Note:  
The errors which will cause SBC Restart or SBC Fail-Safe Mode (Vcc1_UV, WD_FAIL, VCC1_SC, TSD2,  
FAILURE) are the exceptions of an INT generation on status bits. Also POR and DEV_STAT_x and will  
not generate interrupts.  
In addition to this behavior, an INT will be triggered when the SBC is sent to SBC Stop Mode and not all bits  
were cleared in the WK_STAT_1 and WK_STAT_2register.  
The SPI status registers are updated at every falling edge of the INT pulse. All interrupt events are stored in the  
respective register (except the register WK_LVL_STAT) until the register is read and cleared via SPI command.  
A second SPI read after reading out the respective status register is optional but recommended to verify that  
the interrupt event is not present anymore. The interrupt behavior is shown in Figure 43 for class 1 interrupts.  
The behavior for class 2 is identical.  
The INT pin is also used during SBC Init Mode to select the hardware configuration of the device. See  
Chapter 5.1.1 for further information.  
Datasheet  
97  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Interrupt Function  
WK1  
WK2  
INT  
tINTD  
tINT  
Update of  
WK_STAT register  
Update of  
WK_STAT register  
optional  
no WK  
SPI  
Read & Clear  
WK_STAT  
contents  
WK1  
no WK  
WK2  
SPI  
Read & Clear  
No SPI Read & Clear  
Command sent  
WK_STAT  
contents  
WK1 + WK2  
no WK  
Interrupt_Behavior.vsd  
Figure 43 Interrupt Signalization Behavior  
Datasheet  
98  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Interrupt Function  
13.2  
Electrical Characteristics  
Table 24  
Electrical Characteristics  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; SBC Normal Mode; all voltages with respect to ground; positive current  
defined flowing into pin; unless otherwise specified.  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
Max.  
Interrupt Output; Pin INT  
1)  
INT High Output Voltage VINT,H  
0.8 ×  
VCC1  
V
V
I
= -1 mA;  
P_13.2.1  
P_13.2.2  
INT  
INT = OFF  
1)  
INT Low Output Voltage VINT,L  
0.2 ×  
I
= 1 mA;  
INT  
VCC1  
INT = ON  
2)  
INT Pulse Width  
tINT  
80  
80  
100  
100  
120  
120  
µs  
µs  
P_13.2.3  
P_13.2.4  
INT Pulse Minimum Delay tINTD  
2) between  
Time  
consecutive pulses  
Configuration Select; Pin INT  
Config Pull-down  
Resistance  
RCFG  
180  
5
250  
10  
350  
14  
kΩ  
VINT = 5 V  
P_13.2.5  
P_13.2.6  
2)  
Config Select Filter Time tCFG_F  
µs  
1) Output Voltage Value also determines device configuration during SBC Init Mode  
2) Not subject to production test, tolerance defined by internal oscillator tolerance.  
Datasheet  
99  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Fail Outputs  
14  
Fail Outputs  
14.1  
Block and Functional Description  
5V_int  
T test  
SBC Init  
Mode  
RTEST  
FO1/2  
Failure logic  
FO3/TEST  
TFO_PL  
Failure Logic  
Figure 44 Simplified Fail Output Block Diagram for FO1/2 and for FO3/TEST  
The fail outputs consist of a failure logic block and three open-drain outputs (FO1, FO2, FO3) with active-low  
signalization.  
The fail outputs are activated due to following failure conditions:  
Watchdog trigger failure (For config 3&4 only after the 2nd watchdog trigger failure and for config 1&2 after  
1st watchdog trigger failure)  
Thermal shutdown TSD2  
VCC1 short to GND  
VCC1 overvoltage (only if the SPI bit VCC1_OV_RST is set)  
After 4 consecutive VCC1 undervoltage event (see Chapter 15.6 for details)  
At the same time SBC Fail-Safe Mode is entered (exceptions are watchdog trigger failures depending on  
selected  
configurations - see Chapter 5.1.1).  
The fail output activation is signalled in the SPI bit FAILURE of the register DEV_STAT.  
For testing purposes only the Fail Outputs can also be activated via SPI by setting the bit FO_ON. This bit is  
independent of the FO failure bits. In case that there is no failure condition, the FO outputs can also be turned  
off again via SPI, i.e. no successful watchdog trigger is needed.  
The entry of SBC Fail-Safe Mode due to a watchdog failure can be configured as described in Chapter 5.1.1.  
In order to deactivate the fail outputs in SBC Normal Mode the failure conditions must not be present anymore  
(e.g. TSD2, VCC1 short circuit, etc) and the bit FAILURE needs to be cleared via SPI command.  
In case of a watchdog failure the correct procedure to deactivate the fail outputs is:  
a successful WD trigger, i.e. WD_FAIL must be cleared  
clearing of the FAILURE bit  
WD_FAIL will also be cleared when going to SBC Sleep or SBC Fail-Safe Mode due to another failure (not a WD  
failure) or if the watchdog is disabled in SBC Stop Mode  
Datasheet  
100  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Fail Outputs  
Note:  
The Fail output pin is triggered for any of the above described failures. No FAILURE is caused for the  
1st watchdog failure if selected for Config2.  
The three fail outputs are activated simultaneously with following output functionalities:  
FO1: Static fail output  
FO2: 1.25Hz, 50% (typ.) duty cycle, e.g. to generate an indicator signal  
FO3: 100Hz PWM, 20% (typ.) duty cycle, e.g. to generate a dimmed rear light from a break light.  
Note:  
The duty cycle for FO3 can be configured via SPI option to 20%, 10%, 5% or 2.5%. Default value is  
20%. See the register FO_DC for configuration.  
14.1.1  
General Purpose I/O Functionality of FO2 and FO3 as Alternate Function  
In case that FO2 and FO3 are not used in the application, those pins can also be configured with an alternate  
function as high-voltage (VSHS related) General Purpose I/O pins.  
VSHS  
Config &  
Control Logic  
FOx/  
GPIOx  
Figure 45 Simplified General Purpose I/O block diagram for FO2 and FO3/TEST  
The pins are by default configured as FO pins. The configuration is done via the SPI register GPIO_CTRL. The  
alternate function can be:  
Wake Inputs: The detection threshold VGPIOI,th is similar as for the WK inputs. The wake-up detection  
behavior is the same as for WKx pins. Wake events are stored and reported in WK_STAT_2.  
Low-Side Switches: The switch is able to drive currents of up to 10mA (see also VGPIOL,L1). It is self-protected  
with regards to current limitation. No other diagnosis is implemented.  
High-Side Switches: The switch is able to drive currents up to 10mA (see also VGPIOH,H1). It is self-protected  
with regards to current limitation. No other diagnosis is implemented.  
If configured as GPIO then the respective level at the pin will be shown in WK_LVL_STAT in SBC Normal and  
Stop Mode. This is also the case if configured as LS/HS and can serve as a feedback about the respective  
state. GPIO2 is shared with the TEST level bit.  
Table 25 describes the behavior of the FO/GPIO pins in their different configurations and SBC modes.  
Datasheet  
101  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Fail Outputs  
Table 25  
FOx  
Configuration Mode  
FOx (default)  
OFF  
Fail-Output and GPIO configuration behavior during the respective SBC Modes  
SBC Normal  
SBC Stop Mode SBC Sleep Mode SBC Restart  
Mode  
SBC Fail-Safe  
Mode  
fixed  
fixed  
active / fixed  
OFF  
active  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
configurable  
Wake Input  
Low-Side  
High-Side  
wake capable  
fixed  
wake capable  
fixed  
wake capable  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
fixed  
fixed  
OFF  
OFF  
Explanation of FO/GPIO states:  
configurable: settings can be changed in this SBC mode  
fixed: settings stay as configured in SBC Normal Mode  
active: FOx is activated due to a failure leading to SBC Restart or Fail-Safe Mode.  
Restart Behavior:  
The behavior during SBC Restart and Fail-Safe Mode as well as the transition to SBC Normal Mode is as follows:  
if configured as Wake Input: it will stay wake capable during SBC Restart Mode and OFF while in SBC Fail-  
Safe Mode. It will resume wake capability when leaving SBC Restart Mode (SPI register is not modified)  
if configured as Low-Side or High-Side: They will be disabled during SBC Restart and Fail-Safe Mode. After  
leaving SBC Restart Mode the previously configured function will be resumed (SPI register is not modified)  
if configured as FO and activated due to a failure: FO will stay activated during SBC Restart Mode and when  
entering SBC Normal Mode (SPI register is not modified)  
Notes  
1. In order to avoid unintentional entry of SBC Development Mode care must be taken that the level of FO3/TEST  
is HIGH during device power up and SBC Init Mode.  
2. The FOx drivers are supplied via VS. However, the GPIO HS switches (FO2, FO3/TEST) are supplied by VSHS  
Datasheet  
102  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Fail Outputs  
14.2  
Electrical Characteristics  
Table 26  
Electrical Characteristics  
VSHS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; SBC Normal Mode; all voltages with respect to ground; positive current  
defined flowing into pin; unless otherwise specified.1)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
Max.  
Pin FO1  
FO1 low output voltage  
(active)  
VFO,L1  
0
1.0  
2
V
IFO = 4mA  
P_14.2.1  
P_14.2.2  
FO1 high output current IFO,H  
µA  
VFO = 28V  
(inactive)  
Pin FO2  
3)  
3)  
FO2 side indicator  
frequency  
fFO2SI  
1.00  
45  
1.25  
50  
1.50  
55  
Hz  
%
P_14.2.3  
P_14.2.4  
FO2 side indicator duty  
cycle  
dFO2SI  
Pin FO3/TEST2)  
Pull-up Resistance at pin RTEST  
FO3/TEST  
2.5  
5
10  
kΩ  
VTEST =0V;  
SBC Init Mode  
3)  
P_14.2.5  
TEST Input Filter Time  
tTEST  
50  
80  
64  
80  
µs  
Hz  
P_14.2.6  
P_14.2.7  
3)  
FO3 pulsed  
fFO3PL  
100  
120  
light frequency  
FO3 pulsed  
dFO3PL  
16  
20  
24  
%
3)4)default setting  
P_14.2.8  
light duty cycle  
Alternate FO2...3  
Electrical Characteristics: GPIO  
GPIO low-side output  
voltage (active)  
VGPIOL,L1  
1
V
IGPIO = 10mA  
P_14.2.9  
5)  
GPIO low-side output  
voltage (active)  
VGPIOL,L2  
5
mV  
V
I
= 50µA  
P_14.2.17  
P_14.2.10  
P_14.2.18  
GPIO  
GPIO high-side output  
voltage (active)  
VGPIOH,H1 VSHS-1  
VGPIOH,H2 VSHS-5  
IGPO = -10mA  
5)  
GPIO high-side output  
voltage (active)  
mV  
V
I
= -50µA  
GPO  
GPIO input threshold  
voltage  
VGPIOI,th  
1.5  
2.5  
400  
3.5  
700  
6) hysteresis included P_14.2.11  
5)  
GPIO input threshold  
hysteresis  
VGPIOI,hys 100  
mV  
P_14.2.12  
Datasheet  
103  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Fail Outputs  
Table 26  
Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)  
VSHS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; SBC Normal Mode; all voltages with respect to ground; positive current  
defined flowing into pin; unless otherwise specified.1)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
IGPIOL,max 10  
Max.  
GPIO low-side current  
limitation  
30  
mA  
VGPIO = 28V  
P_14.2.13  
P_14.2.14  
GPIO high-side current  
limitation  
IGPIOH,max -45  
-10  
mA  
VGPIO = 0V  
1) The FOx drivers are supplied via VS. However, the GPIO HS switches (FO2, FO3/TEST) are supplied by VSHS  
2) The external capacitance on this pin must be limited to less than 10nF to ensure proper detection of SBC  
Development Mode and SBC User Mode operation.  
3) Not subject to production test, tolerance defined by internal oscillator tolerance.  
4) The duty cyclic is adjustable via the SPI bits FO_DC.  
5) Not subject to production test, specified by design.  
6) Applies also for TEST voltage input level  
Datasheet  
104  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Supervision Functions  
15  
Supervision Functions  
15.1  
Reset Function  
VCC1  
RO  
Resetlogic  
Incl. filter & delay  
Figure 46 Reset Block Diagram  
15.1.1  
Reset Output Description  
The reset output pin RO provides a reset information to the microcontroller, for example, in the event that the  
output voltage has fallen below the undervoltage threshold VRT1/2/3/4. In case of a reset event, the reset output  
RO is pulled to low after the filter time tRF and stays low as long as the reset event is present plus a reset delay  
time tRD1. When connecting the SBC to battery voltage, the reset signal remains LOW initially. When the output  
voltage Vcc1 has reached the reset default threshold VRT1,r, the reset output RO is released to HIGH after the  
reset delay time tRD1. A reset can also occur due to a watchdog trigger failure. The reset threshold can be  
adjusted via SPI, the default reset threshold is VRT1,f. The RO pin has an integrated pull-up resistor. In case reset  
is triggered, it will be pulled low for Vcc1 1V and for VS VPOR,f (see also Chapter 15.3).  
The timings for the RO triggering regarding VCC1 undervoltage and watchdog trigger is shown in Figure 47.  
Datasheet  
105  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Supervision Functions  
VCC  
VRT1  
t < tRF  
The reset threshold can be  
configured via SPI in SBC  
Normal Mode, default is VRT1  
undervoltage  
t
tCW  
tOW  
tRD1  
tCW  
tLW  
tRD1  
tLW  
tCW  
tOW  
SPI  
RO  
SPI  
Init  
WD  
Trigger  
WD  
Trigger  
SPI  
Init  
t
t
tRF  
tLW= long open window  
tCW= closed window  
tOW= open window  
SBC Init  
SBC Normal  
SBC Restart  
SBC Normal  
Figure 47 Reset Timing Diagram  
15.1.2  
Soft Reset Description  
In SBC Normal and SBC Stop Mode, it is also possible to trigger a device internal reset via a SPI command in  
order to bring the SBC into a defined state in case of failures. In this case the microcontroller must send a SPI  
command and set the MODE bits to ‘11’ in the M_S_CTRL register. As soon as this command becomes valid,  
the SBC is set back to SBC INIT Mode and all SPI registers are set to their default values (see SPI Chapter 16.5  
and Chapter 16.6).  
Two different soft reset configurations are possible via the SPI bit SOFT_ RESET_RO:  
The reset output (RO) is triggered when the soft reset is executed (default setting, the same reset delay  
time tRD1 applies)  
The reset output (RO) is not triggered when the soft reset is executed  
Note:  
The device must be in SBC Normal Mode or SBC Stop Mode when sending this command.  
Otherwise, the command will be ignored.  
15.2  
Watchdog Function  
The watchdog is used to monitor the software execution of the microcontroller and to trigger a reset if the  
microcontroller stops serving the watchdog due to a lock up in the software.  
Two different types of watchdog functions are implemented and can be selected via the bit WD_WIN:  
Time-Out Watchdog (default value)  
Window Watchdog  
The respective watchdog functions can be selected and programmed in SBC Normal Mode. The configuration  
stays unchanged in SBC Stop Mode.  
Please refer to Table 27 to match the SBC Modes with the respective watchdog modes.  
Datasheet  
106  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Supervision Functions  
Table 27  
Watchdog Functionality by SBC Modes  
SBC Mode  
INIT Mode  
Watchdog Mode  
Remarks  
Starts with Long Open  
Window  
Watchdog starts with Long Open Window after RO is  
released  
Normal Mode  
WD Programmable  
Window Watchdog, Time-Out watchdog or switched  
OFF for SBC Stop Mode  
Stop Mode  
Sleep Mode  
Watchdog is fixed or OFF  
OFF  
SBC will start with Long Open Window when  
entering SBC Normal Mode.  
Restart Mode  
OFF  
SBC will start with Long Open Window when  
entering SBC Normal Mode.  
The watchdog timing is programmed via SPI command. As soon as the watchdog is programmed, the timer  
starts with the new setting and the watchdog must be served. The watchdog is triggered by sending a valid  
SPI-write command to the watchdog configuration register. The trigger SPI command is executed when the  
Chip Select input (CSN) becomes HIGH.  
When coming from SBC Init, SBC Restart Mode or in certain cases from SBC Stop Mode, the watchdog timer is  
always started with a long open window. The long open window (tLW = 200ms) allows the microcontroller to  
run its initialization sequences and then to trigger the watchdog via SPI.  
The watchdog timer period can be selected via the watchdog timing bit field (WD_TIMER) and is in the range  
of 10 ms to 1000 ms. This setting is valid for both watchdog types.  
The following watchdog timer periods are available:  
WD Setting 1: 10ms  
WD Setting 2: 20ms  
WD Setting 3: 50ms  
WD Setting 4: 100ms  
WD Setting 5: 200ms  
WD Setting 6: 500ms  
WD Setting 7: 1000ms  
In case of a watchdog reset, SBC Restart or SBC Fail-Safe Mode is entered according to the configuration and  
the SPI bits WD_FAIL are set. Once the RO goes HIGH again the watchdog immediately starts with a long open  
window the SBC enters automatically SBC Normal Mode.  
In SBC Development Mode the watchdog is OFF and therefore no reset and interrupt are generated due to a  
watchdog failure.  
Depending on the configuration, the WD_FAIL bits will be set after a watchdog trigger failure as follows:  
In case an incorrect WD trigger is received (triggering in the closed watchdog window or when the  
watchdog counter expires without a valid trigger) then the WD_FAIL bits will be increased (showing the  
number of incorrect WD triggers)  
For config 2: the bits can have the maximum value of ‘01’  
For config 1, 3 and 4: the bits can have the maximum value of ‘10’  
The WD_FAIL bits are cleared automatically when following conditions apply:  
Datasheet  
107  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Supervision Functions  
After a successful watchdog trigger  
When the watchdog is OFF: in SBC Stop Mode after successfully disabling it, in SBC Sleep Mode, or in SBC  
Fail-Safe Mode (except for a watchdog failure)  
15.2.1  
Time-Out Watchdog  
The time-out watchdog is an easier and less secure watchdog than a window watchdog as the watchdog  
trigger can be done at any time within the configured watchdog timer period.  
A correct watchdog service immediately results in starting a new watchdog timer period. Taking the  
tolerances of the internal oscillator into account leads to the safe trigger area as defined in Figure 48.  
If the time-out watchdog period elapses, a watchdog reset is created by setting the reset output RO low and  
the SBC switches to SBC Restart or SBC Fail-Safe Mode.  
Typical timout watchdog trigger period  
t
WD x 1.50  
open window  
uncertainty  
Watchdog Timer Period (WD_TIMER)  
tWD x 1.20  
tWD x 1.80  
t / [tWD_TIMER  
]
safe trigger area  
Wd1_TimeOut_per.vsd  
Figure 48 Time-out Watchdog Definition  
Datasheet  
108  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Supervision Functions  
15.2.2  
Window Watchdog  
Compared to the time-out watchdog the characteristic of the window watchdog is that the watchdog timer  
period is divided between an closed and an open window. The watchdog must be triggered within the open  
window.  
A correct watchdog trigger results in starting the window watchdog period by a closed window followed by an  
open window.  
The watchdog timer period is at the same time the typical trigger time and defines the middle of the open  
window. Taking the oscillator tolerances into account leads to a safe trigger area of:  
tWD x 0.72 < safe trigger area < tWD x 1.20.  
The typical closed window is defined to a width of 60% of the selected window watchdog timer period. Taking  
the tolerances of the internal oscillator into account leads to the timings as defined in Figure 49.  
A correct watchdog service immediately results in starting the next closed window.  
Should the trigger signal meet the closed window or should the watchdog timer period elapse, then a  
watchdog reset is created by setting the reset output RO low and the SBC switches to SBC Restart or SBC Fail-  
Safe Mode.  
tWD x 0.6  
tWD x 0.9  
Typ. closed window  
Typ. open window  
tWD x 0.48  
tWD x 0.72  
tWD x 1.0  
tWD x 1.20  
tWD x 1.80  
closed window  
uncertainty  
open window  
uncertainty  
Watchdog Timer Period (WD_TIMER)  
t / [tWD_TIMER  
]
safe trigger area  
Figure 49 Window Watchdog Definition  
Datasheet  
109  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Supervision Functions  
15.2.3  
Watchdog Setting Check Sum  
A check sum bit is part of the SPI commend to trigger the watchdog and to set the watchdog setting.  
The sum of the 8 data bits in the register WWD_CTRL needs to have even parity (see Equation (15.1)). This is  
realized by either setting the bit CHECKSUM to 0 or 1. If the check sum is wrong, then the SPI command is  
ignored, i.e. the watchdog is not triggered or the settings are not changed and the bit SPI_FAIL is set.  
The checksum is calculated by taking all 8 data bits into account. The written value of the reserved bit 3 of the  
WWD_CTRL register is considered (even if read as ‘0’ in the SPI output) for checksum calculation, i.e. if a 1 is  
written on the reserved bit position, then a 1 will be used in the checksum calculation.  
(15.1)  
CHKSUM = Bit15 ⊕ … ⊕ Bit8  
Datasheet  
110  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Supervision Functions  
15.2.4  
Watchdog during SBC Stop Mode  
The watchdog can be disabled for SBC Stop Mode in SBC Normal Mode. For safety reasons, there is a special  
sequence to be followed in order to disable the watchdog as described in Figure 50. Two different SPI bits  
(WD_STM_ EN_0, WD_STM_ EN_1) in the registers WK_CTRL_1 and WD_CTRL need to be set.  
Correct WD disabling  
Sequence Errors  
sequence  
Missing to set bit  
WD_STM_EN_0 with the  
next watchdog trigger after  
having set WD_STM_EN_1  
Set bit  
WD_STM_EN_1 = 1  
with next WD Trigger  
Staying in Normal Mode  
instead of going to Stop  
Mode with the next trigger  
Set bit  
WD_STM_EN_0 = 1  
Before subsequent WD Trigger  
Will enable the WD:  
Change to  
SBC Stop Mode  
Switching back to SBC  
Normal Mode  
Triggering the watchdog  
WD is switched off  
Figure 50 Watchdog disabling sequence in SBC Stop Mode  
If a sequence error occurs, then the bit WD_STM_ EN_1 will be cleared and the sequence has to be started  
again.  
The watchdog can be enabled by triggering the watchdog in SBC Stop Mode or by switching back to SBC  
Normal Mode via SPI command. In both cases the watchdog will start with a long open window and the bits  
WD_STM_EN_1 and WD_STM_ EN_0 are cleared. After the long open window the watchdog has to be served  
as configured in the WD_CTRL register.  
Note:  
The bit WD_STM_ EN_0 will be cleared automatically when the sequence is started and it was 1  
before.  
Datasheet  
111  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Supervision Functions  
15.2.5  
Watchdog Start in SBC Stop Mode due to Bus Wake  
In SBC Stop Mode the Watchdog can be disabled. In addition a feature is available which will start the  
watchdog with any BUS wake (CAN or LIN) during SBC Stop Mode. The feature is enabled by setting the bit  
WD_EN_ WK_BUS = 1  
(= default value after POR). The bit can only be changed in SBC Normal Mode and needs to be programmed  
before starting the watchdog disable sequence.  
A wake on CAN and LINx will generate an interrupt and the RXD pin for LINx or CAN is pulled to low. By these  
signals the microcontroller is informed that the watchdog is startedwith a long open window. After the long  
open window the watchdog has to be served as configured in the WD_CTRL register.  
To disable the watchdog again, the SBC needs to be switched to Normal Mode and the sequence needs to be  
sent again.  
Datasheet  
112  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Supervision Functions  
15.3  
VS Power On Reset  
At power up of the device, the VS Power on Reset is detected when VS > VPOR,r and the SPI bit POR is set to  
indicate that all SPI registers are set to POR default settings. VCC1 is starting up and the reset output will be  
kept LOW and will only be released once VCC1 has crossed VRT1,r and after tRD1 has elapsed.  
In case VS < VPOR,f, an device internal reset will be generated and the SBC is switched OFF and will restart in  
INIT mode at the next VS rising. This is shown in Figure 51.  
VS  
VPOR,r  
VPOR,f  
t
t
VCC1  
VRT1,r  
The reset threshold can be  
configured via SPI in SBC  
VRTx,f  
Normal Mode, default is VRT1  
RO  
SBC Restart Mode is  
entered whenever the  
Reset is triggered  
t
tRD1  
SBC Mode  
Re-  
start  
SBC OFF  
SBC INIT MODE  
Any SBC MODE  
SBC OFF  
t
SPI  
Command  
Figure 51 Ramp up / down example of Supply Voltage  
Datasheet  
113  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Supervision Functions  
15.4  
Undervoltage VS and VSHS  
If the supply voltage VS reaches the undervoltage threshold VS,UV then the SBC does the following measures:  
SPI bit VS_UV is set. No other error bits are set. The bit can be cleared once the condition is not present  
anymore,  
VCC3 is disabled (see Chapter 8.2) unless the control bit VCC3_VS_ UV_OFF is set  
The VCC1 short circuit protection becomes inactive (see Chapter 15.7). However, the thermal protection  
of the device remains active.  
If the undervoltage threshold is exceeded (VS rising) then functions will be automatically enabled again.  
If the supply voltage VSHS passes below the undervoltage threshold (VSHS,UVD) the SBC does the following  
measures:  
HS1...4 are acting accordingly to the SPI setting (see Chapter 9)  
LINx: Transmitter and Receiver are disabled during the VSHS undervoltage condition (see Chapter 11.2.7);  
SPI bit VSHS_UV is set. No other error bits are set. The bit can be cleared once the condition is not present  
anymore,  
VCC1, VCC2, WKx and CAN are not affected by VSHS undervoltage  
15.5  
Overvoltage VSHS  
If the supply voltage VSHS reaches the overvoltage threshold (VSHS,OVD) the SBC triggers the following  
measures:  
HS1...4 are acting accordingly to the SPI setting (see Chapter 9)  
SPI bit VSHS_OV is set. No other error bits are set. The bit can be cleared once the condition is not present  
anymore,  
VCC1, VCC2, VCC3, WKx, LIN and CAN are not affected by VS overvoltage  
15.6  
VCC1 Over-/ Undervoltage and Undervoltage Prewarning  
VCC1 Undervoltage and Undervoltage Prewarning  
15.6.1  
A first-level voltage detection threshold is implemented as a prewarning for the microcontroller. The  
prewarning event is signaled with the bit VCC1_ WARN. No other actions are taken.  
As described in Chapter 15.1 and Figure 52, a reset will be triggered (RO pulled ‘low’) when the VCC1 output  
voltage falls below the selected undervoltage threshold (VRTx). The bit VCC1_UV is set and the SBC will enter  
SBC Restart Mode.  
Note:  
The VCC1_ WARN or VCC1_UV bits are not set in Sleep Mode as VCC1 = 0V in this case  
Datasheet  
114  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Supervision Functions  
VCC1  
VRTx  
t
t
tRF  
tRD1  
RO  
SBC Normal  
SBC Restart  
SBC Normal  
Figure 52 VCC1 Undervoltage Timing Diagram  
An additional safety mechanism is implemented to avoid repetitive VCC1 undervoltage resets due to high  
dynamic loads on VCC1:  
A counter is increased for every consecutive VCC1 undervoltage event (regardless on the selected reset  
threshold),  
The counter is active in SBC Init-, Normal-, and Stop Mode,  
For VS < VS,UV the counter will be stopped in SBC Normal Mode (i.e. the VS UV comparator is always enabled  
in SBC Normal Mode),  
A 4th consecutive VCC1 undervoltage event will lead to SBC Fail-Safe Mode entry and to setting the bit  
VCC1_UV _FS  
This counter is cleared:  
when SBC Fail-Safe Mode is entered,  
when the bit VCC1_UV is cleared,  
when a Soft Reset is triggered.  
Note:  
It is recommended to clear the VCC1_UV bit once it was set and detected.  
15.6.2  
VCC1 Overvoltage  
For fail-safe reasons a configurable VCC1 overvoltage detection feature is implemented for SBC Init- and  
Normal Mode.  
In case the VCC1,OV,r threshold is crossed, the SBC triggers following measures depending on the configuration:  
The bit VCC1_ OV is always set;  
If the bit VCC1_OV_RST is set and CFGP = ‘1’, then SBC Restart Mode is entered. The FOx outputs are  
activated. After the reset delay time (tRD1), the SBC Restart Mode is left and SBC Normal Mode is resumed  
even if the VCC1 overvoltage event is still present (see also Figure 53). The VCC1_OV_RST bit is cleared  
automatically;  
If the bit VCC1_OV_RST is set and CFGP = ‘0’, then SBC Fail-Safe Mode is entered and FOx outputs are  
activated.  
Note:  
Before entering SBC Stop Mode the bit VCC1_OV_RST must be set to ‘0’ to avoid unintentional SBC  
Restart or Fail-Safe Mode entry. The status bit VCC1_ OV could be set unintentionally. The reason is  
Datasheet  
115  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Supervision Functions  
that external noise could be coupled into the VCC1 supply line. Especially, in case the VCC1 output  
current in SBC STOP Mode is below the active peak threshold (IVCC1,Ipeak).  
VCC1  
VCC1,OV  
t
t
tVCC1,OV_F  
RO  
tRD1  
SBC Normal  
SBC Restart  
SBC Normal  
Figure 53 VCC1 Overvoltage Timing Diagram  
15.7  
VCC1 Short Circuit and VCC3 Diagnostics  
The short circuit protection feature for VCC1 is implemented as follows (VS needs to be higher than VS,UV):  
If VCC1 is not above the VRTx within tVCC1,SC after device power up or after waking from SBC Sleep Mode then  
the SPI bit VCC1_SC bit is set, VCC1 is turned OFF, the FOx pins are enabled, FAILURE is set and SBC Fail-  
Safe Mode is entered. The SBC can be activated again via wake on CAN, LINx, WKx.  
The same behavior applies, if VCC1 falls below VRTx for longer than tVCC1,SC  
.
VCC3 diagnosis features are implemented as follows:  
Load Sharing: The external PNP is disabled when VS < VS,UV if VCC3_VS_ UV_OFF = 0 or when in SBC Stop  
Mode if VCC3_LS_ STP_ON = ‘0’. All other diagnostic features are disabled because they are provided via  
VCC1.  
Stand-alone configuration: The external PNP is disabled when VS < VS,UV if VCC3_VS_ UV_OFF = 0. The  
overcurrent limitation is signalled via the bit VCC3_OC according to the selected shunt resistor, VCC3  
undervoltage is signalled via the bit VCC3_UV and the regulator is disabled due to VS undervoltage when  
is reached.  
Note:  
Neither VCC1_SC nor VCC3_UV flags are set during power up of VCC1 or turn on of VCC3 respectively.  
15.8  
VCC2 Undervoltage and VCAN Undervoltage  
An undervoltage warning is implemented for VCC2 and VCAN as follows:  
V
CC2 undervoltage Detection: In case VCC2 will drop below the VCC2,UV,f threshold, then the SPI bit VCC2_UV  
is set and can be only cleared via SPI.  
CAN undervoltage Detection: In case the voltage on VCAN will drop below the VCAN_UV threshold, then the SPI  
bit VCAN_UV is set and can be only cleared via SPI.  
V
Note:  
The VCC2_UV flag is not set during turn-on or turn-off of VCC2.  
Datasheet  
116  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Supervision Functions  
15.9  
Thermal Protection  
Three independent and different thermal protection features are implemented in the SBC according to the  
system impact:  
Individual thermal shutdown of specific blocks  
Temperature prewarning of main microcontroller supply VCC1  
SBC thermal shutdown due to VCC1 overtemperature  
15.9.1  
Individual Thermal Shutdown  
As a first-level protection measure the output stages VCC2, CAN, LINx, and HSx are independently switched  
OFF if the respective block reaches the temperature threshold TjTSD1. Then the TSD1 bit is set. This bit can only  
be cleared via SPI once the overtemperature is not present anymore. Independent of the SBC Mode the  
thermal shutdown protection is only active if the respective block is ON.  
The respective modules behave as follows:  
VCC2: Is switched to OFF and the control bits VCC2_ON are cleared. The status bit VCC2_OT is set. Once  
the overtemperature condition is not present anymore, then VCC2 has to be configured again by SPI.  
VCC3 as a stand-alone regulator: Is switched to OFF and the control bits VCC3_ON are cleared. The status  
bit VCC3_OT is set. Once the overtemperature condition is not present anymore VCC3 has to be configured  
again by SPI. It is recommended to clear the VCC3_OT bit before enabling the regulator again.  
VCC3 in load sharing configuration: in case of overtemperature at VCC3 the bit VCC3_OT is set and VCC3 is  
switched off. The regulator will be switched on again automatically once the overtemperature event is not  
present anymore. Also in this case it is recommended to clear the VCC3_OT bit right away.  
CAN: The transmitter is disabled and stays in CAN Normal Mode acting like CAN Receive only mode. The  
status bits CAN_FAIL = ‘01’ are set. Once the overtemperature condition is not present anymore, then the  
CAN transmitter is automatically switched on.  
LINx: The transmitter is disabled and stays in LIN Normal Mode acting like LIN Receive only mode. The  
status bit LIN1_FAIL respectively set to ‘01’. Once the overtemperature condition is not present anymore,  
then the LIN transmitter is automatically switched on.  
HSx: If one or more HSx switches reach the TSD1 threshold, then all HSx switches are turned OFF and the  
control bits for HSx are cleared (see registers HS_CTRL1 and HS_CTRL2). The status bits HSx_OC_OT are  
set (see register HS_OC_OT_STAT). Once the overtemperature condition is not present anymore, then HSx  
has to be configured again by SPI.  
Note:  
The diagnosis bits are not cleared automatically and have to be cleared via SPI once the  
overtemperature condition is not present anymore.  
Datasheet  
117  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Supervision Functions  
15.9.2  
Temperature Prewarning  
As a next level of thermal protection a temperature prewarning is implemented if the main supply VCC1  
reaches the thermal prewarning temperature threshold TjPW. Then the status bit TPW is set. This bit can only  
be cleared via SPI once the overtemperature is not present anymore. Independent of the SBC Mode the  
thermal prewarning is only active if the VCC1 is ON.  
15.9.3  
SBC Thermal Shutdown  
As a highest level of thermal protection a temperature shutdown of the SBC is implemented if the main supply  
VCC1 reaches the thermal shutdown temperature threshold TjTSD2. Once a TSD2 event is detected SBC Fail-  
Safe Mode is entered for tTSD2 to allow the device to cool down. After this time has expired, the SBC will  
automatically change via SBC Restart Mode to SBC Normal Mode (see also Chapter 5.1.6).  
When a TSD2 event is detected, then the status bit TSD2 is set. This bit can only be cleared via SPI in SBC  
Normal Mode once the overtemperature is not present anymore. Independent of the SBC Mode the thermal  
shutdown is only active if VCC1 is ON.  
Datasheet  
118  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Supervision Functions  
15.10  
Electrical Characteristics  
Table 28  
Electrical Specification  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; SBC Normal Mode; all voltages with respect to ground; positive current  
defined flowing into pin; unless otherwise specified.  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
Max.  
VCC1 Monitoring; VCC1 = 5.0V Version  
Undervoltage Prewarning  
Threshold Voltage PW,f  
VPW,f  
VPW,r  
VRT1,f  
VRT1,r  
VRT2,f  
VRT2,r  
VRT3,f  
VRT3,r  
VRT4,f  
VRT4,r  
4.6  
4.7  
4.85  
4.90  
4.75  
4.85  
4.05  
4.15  
3.45  
3.55  
2.8  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
VCC1 falling,  
SPI bit is set  
P_15.10.1  
P_15.10.2  
P_15.10.3  
P_15.10.4  
P_15.10.5  
P_15.10.6  
P_15.10.7  
P_15.10.8  
P_15.10.9  
P_15.10.10  
Undervoltage Prewarning  
Threshold Voltage PW,r  
4.65  
4.5  
4.80  
4.6  
VCC1 rising  
Reset Threshold  
Voltage RT1,f  
default setting;  
VCC1 falling  
Reset Threshold  
Voltage RT1,r  
4.6  
4.7  
default setting;  
VCC1 rising  
Reset Threshold  
Voltage RT2,f  
3.75  
3.85  
3.15  
3.25  
2.4  
3.9  
VCC1 falling  
Reset Threshold  
Voltage RT2,r  
4.0  
VCC1 rising  
Reset Threshold  
Voltage RT3,f  
3.3  
VS 4V;  
VCC1 falling  
Reset Threshold  
Voltage RT3,r  
3.4  
VS 4V;  
VCC1 rising  
Reset Threshold  
Voltage RT4,f  
2.65  
2.75  
VS 4V;  
VCC1 falling  
Reset Threshold  
Voltage RT4,r  
2.5  
2.9  
VS 4V;  
VCC1 rising  
Reset Threshold Hysteresis VRT,hys  
50  
100  
200  
5.6  
mV  
V
P_15.10.11  
P_15.10.50  
VCC1 Overvoltage Detection VCC1,OV,r  
5.3  
1)rising VCC1  
Threshold Voltage  
VCC1 Overvoltage Detection VCC1,OV,f  
Threshold Voltage  
5.2  
5
5.5  
14  
V
falling VCC1  
P_15.10.72  
P_15.10.51  
P_15.10.12  
3)  
VCC1 OV Detection Filter  
Time  
tVCC1,OV_F  
tVCC1,SC  
10  
4
us  
ms  
3)  
VCC1 Short to GND Filter  
Time  
3.2  
4.8  
Reset Generator; Pin RO  
Reset Low Output Voltage  
VRO,L  
0.2  
0.4  
V
V
IRO = 1 mA for  
P_15.10.14  
P_15.10.15  
VCC1 1 V &  
VS VPOR,f  
Reset High Output Voltage VRO,H  
0.8 x  
VCC1  
+
IRO = -20 µA  
VCC1  
0.3 V  
Datasheet  
119  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Supervision Functions  
Table 28  
Electrical Specification (cont’d)  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; SBC Normal Mode; all voltages with respect to ground; positive current  
defined flowing into pin; unless otherwise specified.  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
20  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
10  
Max.  
40  
Reset Pull-up Resistor  
Reset Filter Time  
RRO  
tRF  
kΩ  
VRO = 0 V  
3)  
P_15.10.16  
P_15.10.17  
4
10  
26  
µs  
V
< VRT1x  
CC1  
to RO = L see also  
Chapter 15.3  
2) 3)  
Reset Delay Time  
tRD1  
1.5  
2
2.5  
ms  
P_15.10.18  
VCC2 Monitoring  
VCC2 Undervoltage  
Threshold Voltage (falling)  
VCC2,UV,f  
VCC2,UV,r  
4.5  
4.6  
20  
4.75  
4.9  
V
VCC2 falling  
VCC2 rising  
P_15.10.19  
P_15.10.77  
P_15.10.20  
VCC2 Undervoltage  
Threshold Voltage (rising)  
V
VCC2 Undervoltage detection VCC2,UV, hys  
100  
250  
mV  
hysteresis  
VCC3 Monitoring  
VCC3 Undervoltage Detection VCC3,UV  
4.0  
4.25  
2.85  
4.5  
V
V
VCC3_ V_CFG=0  
hysteresis  
included  
P_15.10.21  
P_15.10.47  
VCC3 Undervoltage Detection VCC3,UV  
2.65  
3.00  
3.3V option or  
VCC3_ V_CFG=1  
hysteresis  
included  
VCC3 Undervoltage detection VCC3,UV, hys  
hysteresis  
20  
100  
250  
mV  
V
P_15.10.22  
P_15.10.23  
VCAN Monitoring  
CAN Supply undervoltage  
detection threshold  
VCAN_UV  
4.45  
4.85  
CAN Normal  
Mode,  
hysteresis  
included;  
Watchdog Generator  
Long Open Window  
Internal Oscillator  
3)4)  
tLW  
160  
0.8  
200  
1.0  
240  
1.2  
ms  
P_15.10.24  
P_15.10.25  
fCLKSBC  
MHz  
Minimum Waiting time during SBC Fail-Safe Mode  
Min. waiting time Fail-Safe tFS,min 80 100  
Power-on Reset, Over- / Undervoltage Protection  
3)5)  
120  
ms  
P_15.10.75  
VS Power on reset rising  
VS Power on reset falling  
VPOR,r  
VPOR,f  
4.7  
3
V
V
VS increasing  
VS decreasing  
P_15.10.26  
P_15.10.27  
Datasheet  
120  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Supervision Functions  
Table 28  
Electrical Specification (cont’d)  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; SBC Normal Mode; all voltages with respect to ground; positive current  
defined flowing into pin; unless otherwise specified.  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
Max.  
VS Undervoltage Detection VS,UV  
5.3  
6.0  
V
Supply UV  
P_15.10.13  
Threshold  
threshold for VCC3  
and VCC1 SC  
detection;  
hysteresis  
included  
VSHS Overvoltage Detection VSHS,OVD  
Threshold  
20  
22  
V
Supply OV  
supervision for  
HSx;  
P_15.10.28  
hysteresis  
included  
6)  
VSHS Overvoltage Detection VSHS,OVD,hys 100  
hysteresis  
500  
mV  
V
P_15.10.29  
P_15.10.30  
VSHS Undervoltage  
Detection Threshold  
VSHS,UVD  
4.8  
5.5  
Supply UV  
supervision for  
LINx, HSx, and HS  
of GPIOx;  
hysteresis  
included  
6)  
VSHS Undervoltage  
Detection hysteresis  
Overtemperature Shutdown6)  
VSHS,UVD,hys 50  
200  
145  
350  
165  
mV  
°C  
P_15.10.31  
P_15.10.32  
Thermal Prewarning  
Temperature  
TjPW  
125  
Thermal Shutdown TSD1  
Thermal Shutdown TSD2  
TjTSD1  
165  
165  
5
185  
185  
15  
200  
200  
25  
°C  
°C  
°C  
P_15.10.33  
P_15.10.34  
P_15.10.68  
TjTSD2  
Thermal Shutdown  
hysteresis  
TjTSD,hys  
3)  
Deactivation time after  
thermal shutdown TSD2  
tTSD2  
0.8  
1
1.2  
s
P_15.10.35  
1) It is ensured that the threshold VCC1,OV,r is always higher than the highest regulated VCC1 output voltage VCC1,out42  
.
2) The reset delay time will start when VCC1 crosses above the selected Vrtx threshold  
3) Not subject to production test, tolerance defined by internal oscillator tolerance.  
4) An additional safety factor of 1.5 needs to be applied like shown in Figure 48.  
5) This time applies for all failure entries except a device thermal shutdown (TSD2 has a typ. 1s waiting time tTSD2  
)
6) Not subject to production test, specified by design.  
Datasheet  
121  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
16  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
16.1  
SPI Block Description  
The 16-bit wide Control Input Word is read via the data input SDI, which is synchronized with the clock input  
CLK provided by the microcontroller. The output word appears synchronously at the data output SDO (see  
Figure 54).  
The transmission cycle begins when the chip is selected by the input CSN (Chip Select Not), LOW active. After  
the CSN input returns from LOW to HIGH, the word that has been read is interpreted according to the content.  
The SDO output switches to tristate status (high impedance) at this point, thereby releasing the SDO bus for  
other use. The state of SDI is shifted into the input register with every falling edge on CLK. The state of SDO is  
shifted out of the output register after every rising edge on CLK. The SPI of the SBC is not daisy chain capable.  
CSN high to low: SDO is enabled. Status information transferred to output shift register  
CSN  
time  
CSN low to high: data from shift register is transferred to output functions  
CLK  
time  
Actual data  
New data  
0 1  
+ +  
SDI  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15  
time  
SDI: will accept data on the falling edge of CLK signal  
Actual status  
New status  
0
1
+
ERR  
SDO  
ERR  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15  
-
+
time  
SDO: will change state on the rising edge of CLK signal  
Figure 54 SPI Data Transfer Timing (note the reversed order of LSB and MSB shown in this figure  
compared to the register description)  
Datasheet  
122  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
16.2  
Failure Signalization in the SPI Data Output  
When the microcontroller sends a wrong SPI command to the SBC, the SBC ignores the information. Wrong  
SPI commands are either invalid SBC mode commands or commands which are prohibited by the state  
machine to avoid undesired device or system states (see below). In this case the diagnosis bit ‘SPI_FAIL’ is set  
and the SPI Write command is ignored (mostly no partial interpretation). This bit can be only reset by actively  
clearing it via a SPI command.  
Invalid SPI Commands leading to SPI_FAIL are listed below:  
Illegal state transitions: Going from SBC Stop to SBC Sleep Mode. In this case the SBC enters in addition the  
SBC Restart Mode;  
Trying to go to SBC Stop or SBC Sleep mode from SBC Init Mode. In this case SBC Normal Mode is entered;  
Uneven parity in the data bit of the WD_CTRL register. In this case the watchdog trigger is ignored or the  
new watchdog settings are ignored respectively;  
In SBC Stop Mode: attempting to change any SPI settings, e.g. changing the watchdog configuration, PWM  
settings and HS configuration settings during SBC Stop Mode, etc.;  
the SPI command is ignored in this case;  
only WD trigger, returning to Normal Mode, triggering a SBC Soft Reset, and Read & Clear status registers  
commands are valid SPI commands in SBC Stop Mode;  
When entering SBC Stop Mode and WK_STAT_1 and WK_STAT_2 are not cleared; SPI_FAIL will not be set  
but the INT pin will be triggered;  
Changing from SBC Stop to Normal Mode and changing the other bits of the M_S_CTRL register. The other  
modifications will be ignored;  
SBC Sleep Mode: attempt to go to Sleep Mode when all bits in the BUS_CTRL_1 and WK_CTRL_2 registers  
are cleared. In this case the SPI_FAIL bit is set and the SBC enters Restart Mode.  
Even though the Sleep Mode command is not entered in this case, the rest of the command (e.g modifying  
VCC2 or VCC3) is executed and the values stay unchanged during SBC Restart Mode;  
Note: At least one wake source must be activated in order to avoid a deadlock situation in SBC Sleep Mode,  
i.e. the SBC would not be able to wake up anymore.  
If the only wake source is a timer and the timer is OFF then the SBC will wake immediately from Sleep Mode  
and enter Restart Mode;  
No failure handling is done for the attempt to go to SBC STOP Mode when all bits in the registers  
BUS_CTRL_1 and WK_CTRL_2 are cleared because the microcontroller can leave this mode via SPI;  
If VCC3 load sharing VCC3_LS is enabled and the microcontroller tries to clear the bit, then the rest of the  
command executed but VCC3_LS will remain set;  
Attempt to enter SBC Sleep Mode if WK_MEAS is set to ‘1’ and only WK1_EN or WK2_EN are set as wake  
sources. Also in this case the SPI_FAIL bit is set and the SBC enters Restart Mode;  
Setting a longer or equal on-time than the timer period of the respective timer;  
SDI stuck at HIGH or LOW, e.g. SDI received all ‘0’ or all ‘1’;  
Note:  
There is no SPI fail information for unused addresses.  
Signalization of the ERR Flag (high active) in the SPI Data Output (see Figure 54):  
The ERR flag presents an additional diagnosis possibility for the SPI communication. The ERR flag is being set  
for following conditions:  
in case the number of received SPI clocks is not 0 or 16,  
in case RO is LOW and SPI frames are being sent at the same time.  
Datasheet  
123  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
Note:  
In order to read the SPI ERR flag properly, CLK must be low when CSN is triggered, i.e. the ERR bit is  
not valid if the CLK is high on a falling edge of CSN  
The number of received SPI clocks is not 0 or 16:  
The number of received input clocks is supervised to be 0- or 16 clock cycles and the input word is discarded  
in case of a mismatch (0 clock cycle to enable ERR signalization). The error logic also recognizes if CLK was high  
during CSN edges. Both errors - 0 bit and 16 bit CLK mismatch or CLK high during CSN edges - are flagged in  
the following SPI output by a “HIGH” at the data output (SDO pin, bit ERR) before the first rising edge of the  
clock is received. The complete SPI command is ignored in this case.  
RO is LOW and SPI frames are being sent at the same time:  
The ERR flag will be set when the RO pin is triggered (during SBC Restart) and SPI frames are being sent to the  
SBC at the same time. The behavior of the ERR flag will be signalized at the next SPI command for below  
conditions:  
if the command begins when RO is HIGH and it ends when RO is LOW,  
if a SPI command will be sent while RO is LOW,  
If a SPI command begins when RO is LOW and it ends when RO is HIGH.  
and the SDO output will behave as follows:  
always when RO is LOW then SDO will be HIGH,  
when a SPI command begins with RO is LOW and ends when RO is HIGH, then the SDO should be ignored  
because wrong data will be sent.  
Notes  
1. It is possible to quickly check for the ERR flag without sending any data bits. i.e. only the CSN is pulled low and  
SDO is observed - no SPI Clocks are sent in this case  
2. The ERR flag could also be set after the SBC has entered SBC Fail-Safe Mode because the SPI communication  
is stopped immediately.  
Datasheet  
124  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
16.3  
SPI Programming  
For the TLE9262BQX, 7 bits are used or the address selection (BIT6...0). Bit 7 is used to decide between Read  
Only and Read & Clear for the status bits, and between Write and Read Only for configuration bits. For the  
actual configuration and status information, 8 data bits (BIT15...8) are used.  
Writing, clearing and reading is done byte wise. The SPI status bits are not cleared automatically and must be  
cleared by the microcontroller, e.g. if the TSD2 was set due to overtemperature. The configuration bits will be  
partially automatically cleared by the SBC - please refer to the individual registers description for detailed  
information. During SBC Restart Mode the SPI communication is ignored by the SBC, i.e. it is not interpreted.  
There are two types of SPI registers:  
Control registers: Those are the registers to configure the SBC, e.g. SBC mode, watchdog trigger, etc  
Status registers: Those are the registers where the status of the SBC is signalled, e.g. wake events,  
warnings, failures, etc.  
For the status registers, the requested information is given in the same SPI command in DO.  
For the control registers, also the status of the respective byte is shown in the same SPI command. However,  
if the setting is changed this is only shown with the next SPI command (it is only valid after CSN high) of the  
same register.  
The SBC status information from the SPI status registers, is transmitted in a compressed way with each SPI  
response on SDO in the so called Status Information Field register (see also Figure 55). The purpose of this  
register is to quickly signal the information to the microcontroller if there was a change in one of the SPI status  
registers. In this way, the microcontroller does not need to read constantly all the SPI status registers but only  
those registers, which were changed.  
Each bit in the Status Information Field represents a SPI status register (see Table 29). As soon as one bit is set  
in one of the status registers, then the respective bit in the Status Information Field register will be set. The  
register WK_LVL_STAT is not included in the status Information field. This is listed in Table 29.  
For Example if bit 0 in the Status Information Field is set to 1, one or more bits of the register 100 0001  
(SUP_STAT_1) is set to 1. Then this register needs to be read in a second SPI command. The bit in the Status  
Information Field will be set to 0 when all bits in the register 100 0001 are set back to 0.  
Table 29  
Status Information Field  
Corresponding  
Bit in Status  
Status Register Description  
Information Field  
Address Bit  
100 0001  
100 0010  
100 0011  
0
SUP_STAT_1: Supply Status -VSHS fail, VCCx fail, POR  
THERM_STAT: Thermal Protection Status  
1
2
DEV_STAT: Device Status - Mode before Wake, WD Fail,  
SPI Fail, Failure  
3
4
100 0100  
100 0110  
BUS_STAT: Bus Failure Status: CAN, LINx;  
WK_STAT_1, WK_STAT_2: Wake Source Status;  
Status bit is set as combinational OR of both registers  
5
6
7
100 0000  
101 0100  
101 0101  
SUP_STAT_2: VCC1_WARN/OV, VCC3 Status  
HS_OC_OT_STAT: High-Side Over Load Status  
HS_OL_STAT: High-Side Open Load Status  
Datasheet  
125  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
LSB  
MSB  
DI  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
x
9
x
10 11 12 13 14 15  
R/W  
Address Bits  
Data Bits  
x
x
x
x
x
x
Register content of  
selected address  
DO  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
x
9
x
10 11 12 13 14 15  
Data Bits  
Status Information Field  
x
x
x
x
x
x
time  
LSB is sent first in SPI message  
Figure 55 SPI Operation Mode  
Datasheet  
126  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
16.4  
SPI Bit Mapping  
The following figures show the mapping of the registers and the SPI bits of the respective registers.  
The Control Registers ‘000 0000’ to ‘001 1110’ are Read/Write Register. Depending on bit 7 the bits are only  
read (setting bit 7 to ‘0’) or also written (setting bit 7 to ‘1’). The new setting of the bit after write can be seen  
with a new read / write command.  
The registers ‘100 0000’ to ‘111 1110’ are Status Registers and can be read or read with clearing the bit (if  
possible) depending on bit 7. To clear a Data Byte of one of the Status Registers bit 7 must be set to 1. The  
registers WK_LVL_STAT, and FAM_PROD_STAT are an exception as they show the actual voltage level at the  
respective WK pin (LOW/HIGH), or a fixed family/ product ID respectively and can thus not be cleared. It is  
recommended for proper diagnosis to clear respective status bits for wake events or failure. However, in  
general it is possible to enable drivers without clearing the respective failure flags.  
When changing to a different SBC Mode, certain configurations bits will be cleared automatically or modified:  
The SBC Mode bits are updated to the actual status, e.g. when returning to Normal Mode  
When changing to a low-power mode (Stop/Sleep), the diagnosis bits of the switches and transceivers are  
not cleared. FOx will stay activated if it was triggered before.  
When changing to SBC Stop Mode, the CAN and LIN control bits will not be modified.  
When changing to SBC Sleep Mode, the CAN and LIN control bits will be modified if they were not OFF or  
wake capable before.  
HSx, VCC2 and VCC3 will stay on when going to Sleep-/Stop Mode (configuration can only be done in  
Normal Mode). Diagnosis is active (OC, OL, OT). In case of a failure the switch is turned off and no wake-up  
is issued  
The configuration bits for HSx and VCC2 in stand-alone configuration are cleared in SBC Restart Mode. FOx  
will stay activated if it was triggered before. Depending on the respective configuration, CAN/LIN  
transceivers will be either OFF, woken or still wake capable.  
Note:  
The detailed behavior of the respective SPI bits and control functions is described in Chapter 16.5,  
Chapter 16.6.and in the respective module chapter. The bit type be marked as ‘rwh’ in case the SBC  
will modify respective control bits.  
Datasheet  
127  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
MSB  
LSB  
15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reg.  
Type  
7 Address Bits [bits 0...6]  
8 Data Bits [bits 8...15]  
for Configuration & Status Information  
for Register Selection  
M_S_CTRL  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
0 0 0 0 0 0 1  
0 0 0 0 0 1 0  
0 0 0 0 0 1 1  
0 0 0 0 1 0 0  
0 0 0 0 1 0 1  
0 0 0 0 1 1 0  
0 0 0 0 1 1 1  
0 0 0 1 0 0 0  
0 0 0 1 0 0 1  
0 0 0 1 1 0 0  
0 0 0 1 1 0 1  
0 0 1 0 0 0 0  
0 0 1 0 1 0 0  
0 0 1 0 1 0 1  
0 0 1 0 1 1 1  
0 0 1 1 0 0 0  
0 0 1 1 0 0 1  
0 0 1 1 1 0 0  
0 0 1 1 1 1 0  
HW_CTRL  
WD_CTRL  
BUS_CTRL_1  
BUS_CTRL_2  
WK_CTRL_1  
WK_CTRL_2  
WK_PUPD_CTRL  
WK_FLT_CTRL  
TIMER1_CTRL  
TIMER2_CTRL  
SW_SD_CTRL  
HS_CTRL_1  
HS_CTRL_2  
GPIO_CTRL  
PWM1_CTRL  
PWM2_CTRL  
PWM_FREQ_CTRL  
SYS_STAT_CTRL  
rw  
rw  
5
0
1
2
3
3
4
4
-
SUP_STAT_2  
SUP_STAT_1  
THERM_STAT  
rc  
rc  
rc  
1 0 0 0 0 0 0  
1 0 0 0 0 0 1  
1 0 0 0 0 1 0  
1 0 0 0 0 1 1  
1 0 0 0 1 0 0  
DEV_STAT  
BUS_STAT_1  
BUS_STAT_2  
WK_STAT_1  
rc  
rc  
rc  
rc  
rc  
r
1 0 0 0 1 0 1  
1 0 0 0 1 1 0  
WK_STAT_2  
1 0 0 0 1 1 1  
1 0 0 1 0 0 0  
1 0 1 0 1 0 0  
1 0 1 0 1 0 1  
1 1 1 1 1 1 0  
WK_LVL_STAT  
HS_OC_OT_STAT  
HS_OL_STAT  
FAM_PROD_STAT  
rc  
rc  
r
6
7
Figure 56  
SPI Register Mapping  
Datasheet  
128  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
Figure 57  
TLE9262BQX SPI Bit Mapping  
Datasheet  
129  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
16.5  
SPI Control Registers  
READ/WRITE Operation (see also Chapter 16.3):  
The ‘POR / Soft Reset Value’ defines the register content after POR or SBC Reset.  
The ‘Restart Value’ defines the register content after SBC Restart, where ‘x’ means the bit is unchanged.  
One 16-bit SPI command consist of two bytes:  
- the 7-bit address and one additional bit for the register access mode and  
- following the data byte  
The numbering of following bit definitions refers to the data byte and correspond to the bits D0...D7 and to  
the SPI bits 8...15 (see also figure before).  
There are three different bit types:  
- ‘r’ = READ: read only bits (or reserved bits)  
- ‘rw’ = READ/WRITE: readable and writable bits  
- ‘rwh’ = READ/WRITE/Hardware: readable/writable bits, which can also be modified by the SBC hardware  
Reserved bits are marked as “Reserved” and always read as “0”. The respective bits shall also be  
programmed as “0”.  
Reading a register is done byte wise by setting the SPI bit 7 to “0” (= Read Only).  
Writing to a register is done byte wise by setting the SPI bit 7 to “1”.  
SPI control bits are in general not cleared or changed automatically. This must be done by the  
microcontroller via SPI programming. Exceptions to this behavior are stated at the respective register  
description and the respective bit type is marked with a ‘h’ meaning that the SBC is able to change the  
register content.  
The registers are addressed wordwise.  
Datasheet  
130  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
16.5.1  
General Control Registers  
M_S_CTRL  
Mode- and Supply Control (Address 000 0001B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 00x0 00xxB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
VCC1_OV_RS  
T
MODE_1  
MODE_0  
VCC3_ON  
VCC2_ON_1 VCC2_ON_0  
VCC1_RT_1 VCC1_RT_0  
r
rwh  
rwh  
rwh  
rwh  
rwh  
rwh  
rw  
rw  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
MODE  
7:6  
rwh  
SBC Mode Control  
00B , SBC Normal Mode  
01B , SBC Sleep Mode  
10B , SBC Stop Mode  
11B , SBC Reset: Soft Reset is executed (configuration of RO  
triggering in bit SOFT_ RESET_RO)  
VCC3_ON  
VCC2_ON  
5
rwh  
rwh  
VCC3 Mode Control  
0B , VCC3 OFF  
1B , VCC3 is enabled (as independent voltage regulator)  
4:3  
VCC2 Mode Control  
00B , VCC2 off  
01B , VCC2 on in Normal Mode  
10B , VCC2 on in Normal and Stop Mode  
11B , VCC2 always on (except in SBC Fail-Safe Mode)  
VCC1_OV_R  
ST  
2
rwh  
rw  
VCC1 Overvoltage leading to Restart / Fail-Safe Mode enable  
0B , VCC1_ OV is set in case of VCC1_OV; no SBC Restart or Fail-  
Safe is entered for VCC1_OV  
1B , VCC1_ OV is set in case of VCC1_OV; depending on the  
device configuration SBC Restart or SBC Fail-Safe Mode is  
entered (see Chapter 5.1.1);  
VCC1_RT  
1:0  
VCC1 Reset Threshold Control  
00B , Vrt1 selected (highest threshold)  
01B , Vrt2 selected  
10B , Vrt3 selected  
11B , Vrt4 selected  
Notes  
1. It is not possible to change from Stop to Sleep Mode via SPI Command. See also the State Machine Chapter  
2. After entering SBC Restart Mode, the MODE bits will be automatically set to SBC Normal Mode. The VCC2_ON  
bits will be automatically set to OFF after entering SBC Restart Mode and after OT.  
3. The SPI output will always show the previously written state with a Write Command (what has been  
programmed before)  
Datasheet  
131  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
HW_CTRL  
Mode- and Supply Control (Address 000 0010B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: y000 y000B;  
Restart Value: xx0x x00xB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SOFT_RESET  
_RO  
VCC3_VS_UV  
_OFF  
VCC3_LS_ST  
P_ON  
VCC3_V_CFG  
FO_ON  
VCC3_LS  
Reserved  
CFG  
r
rw  
rw  
rwh  
rw  
rw  
r
rw  
rw  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
VCC3_  
V_CFG  
7
rw  
VCC3 Output Voltage Configuration (if configured as  
independent voltage regulator)  
0B , VCC3 has same output voltage as VCC1  
1B , VCC3 is configured to either 3.3V or 1.8V (depending on VCC1  
derivative)  
SOFT_  
RESET_RO  
6
5
rw  
Soft Reset Configuration  
0B , RO will be triggered (pulled low) during a Soft Reset  
1B , No RO triggering during a Soft Reset  
FO_ON  
rwh  
Failure Output Activation (FO1..3)  
0B , FOx not activated by software, FO can be activated by  
defined failures (see Chapter 14)  
1B , FOx activated by software (via SPI)  
VCC3_VS_  
UV_OFF  
4
3
rw  
rw  
VCC3 VS_UV shutdown configuration  
0B , VCC3 will be disabled automatically at VS_UV  
1B , VCC3 will stay enabled even below VS_UV  
VCC3_LS  
VCC3 Configuration  
0B , VCC3 operating as a stand-alone regulator  
1B , VCC3 in load sharing operation with VCC1  
Reserved  
2
1
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
VCC3_LS_  
STP_ON  
rw  
VCC3 Load Sharing in SBC Stop Mode configuration  
0B , VCC3 in LS configuration during SBC Stop Mode and high-  
power mode: disabled  
1B , VCC3 in LS configuration during SBC Stop Mode and high-  
power mode: enabled  
CFG  
0
rw  
Configuration Select (see also Table 5)  
0B , Depending on hardware configuration, SBC Restart or Fail-  
Safe Mode is reached after the 2. watchdog trigger failure  
(=default) - Config 3/4  
1B , Depending on hardware configuration, SBC Restart or Fail-  
Safe Mode is reached after the 1. watchdog trigger failure -  
Config 1/2  
Notes  
1. Clearing the FO_ON bit will not disable the FOx outputs for the case a failure occurred which triggered the FOx  
outputs. In this case the FOx outputs have to be disabled by clearing the FAILURE bit.  
Datasheet  
132  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
If the FO_ON bit is set by the software then it will be cleared by the SBC after SBC Restart Mode was entered  
and the FOx outputs will be disabled. See also Chapter 14 for FOx activation and deactivation.  
2. After triggering a SBC Soft Reset the bits VCC3_V_CFG and VCC3_LS are not reset if they were set before, i.e. it  
stays unchanged, which is stated by the ‘y’ in the POR / Soft Reset Value. POR value: 0000 0000 and Soft Reset  
value: xx00 x00x  
3. VCC3_LS_STP_ON: Is a combination of load sharing and VCC1 active peak in Stop mode  
Datasheet  
133  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
WD_CTRL  
Watchdog Control (Address 000 0011B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0001 0100B;  
Restart Value: x0xx 0100B  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
WD_STM_  
EN_0  
WD_EN_  
WK_BUS  
CHECKSUM  
WD_WIN  
Reserved WD_TIMER_2 WD_TIMER_1 WD_TIMER_0  
r
rw  
rwh  
rw  
rw  
r
rwh  
rwh  
rwh  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
CHECKSUM  
7
rw  
Watchdog Setting Check Sum Bit  
The sum of bits 7:0 needs to have even parity (see Chapter 15.2.3)  
0B , Counts as 0 for checksum calculation  
1B , Counts as 1 for checksum calculation  
WD_STM_  
EN_0  
6
rwh  
Watchdog Deactivation during Stop Mode, bit 0  
(Chapter 15.2.4)  
0B , Watchdog is active in Stop Mode  
1B , Watchdog is deactivated in Stop Mode  
WD_WIN  
5
4
rw  
rw  
Watchdog Type Selection  
0B , Watchdog works as a Time-Out watchdog  
1B , Watchdog works as a Window watchdog  
WD_EN_  
WK_BUS  
Watchdog Enable after Bus (CAN/LIN) Wake in SBC Stop Mode  
0B , Watchdog will not start after a CAN/LINx wake  
1B , Watchdog starts with a long open window after CAN/LINx  
Wake  
Reserved  
3
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
WD_TIMER 2:0  
rwh  
Watchdog Timer Period  
000B , 10ms  
001B , 20ms  
010B , 50ms  
011B , 100ms  
100B , 200ms  
101B , 500ms  
110B , 1000ms  
111B , reserved  
Notes  
1. See also Chapter 15.2.4 for more information on disabling the watchdog in SBC Stop Mode.  
2. See Chapter 15.2.5 for more information on the effect of the bit WD_EN_WK_BUS.  
3. See Chapter 15.2.3 for calculation of checksum.  
Datasheet  
134  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
BUS_CTRL_1  
Bus Control (Address 000 0100B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0010 0000B;  
Restart Value: xxxy y0yyB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LIN_FLASH  
LIN_LSM  
LIN_TXD_TO  
LIN1_1  
LIN1_0  
Reserved  
CAN_1  
CAN_0  
r
rw  
rw  
rw  
rwh  
rwh  
r
rwh  
rwh  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
LIN_FLASH  
7
rw  
LINx Flash Programming Mode  
0B , Slope control mechanism active  
1B , Deactivation of slope control for baud rates up to 115kBaud  
LIN_LSM  
6
rw  
LINx Low-Slope Mode Selection  
0B , LIN Normal-Mode is activated  
1B , LIN Low-Slope Mode (10.4kBaud) activated  
LIN_TXD_  
TO  
5
rw  
LINx TXD Time-Out Control  
0B , TXD Time-Out feature disabled  
1B , TXD Time-Out feature enabled  
LIN1  
4:3  
rwh  
LIN1-Module Mode  
00B , LIN1 OFF  
01B , LIN1 is wake capable  
10B , LIN1 Receive Only Mode  
11B , LIN1 Normal Mode  
Reserved  
CAN  
2
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
1:0  
rwh  
HS-CAN Module Modes  
00B , CAN OFF  
01B , CAN is wake capable  
10B , CAN Receive Only Mode  
11B , CAN Normal Mode  
Notes  
1. Changes in the bits LIN_FLASH, LIN_LSM, and LIN_TXD_ TO will be effective immediately once CSN goes to  
‘1’ and applies for both LIN transceivers.’  
2. The reset values for the LINx and CAN transceivers are marked with ‘y’ because they will vary depending on  
the cause of change - see below.  
3. see Figure 26 and Figure 33 for detailed state changes of LIN and CAN Transceiver for different SBC modes.  
4. Failure Handling Mechanism: When the device enters Fail-Safe Mode due to a failure (TSD2, WD-Failure,...),  
then the wake registers BUS_CTRL_1 and WK_CTRL_2 are reset to following values (=wake sources) ‘xxx0  
1001’ and ‘x0x0 0111’ in order to ensure that the device can be woken again.  
Datasheet  
135  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
BUS_CTRL_2  
Bus Control (Address 000 0101B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 00x0 0000B  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
I_PEAK_TH  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
r
r
r
rw  
r
r
r
r
r
Field  
Bits  
Type  
r
Description  
Reserved  
7:6  
5
Reserved, always reads as 0  
I_PEAK_TH  
rw  
VCC1 Active Peak Threshold Selection  
0B , low VCC1 active peak threshold selected (ICC1,peak_1)  
1B , higher VCC1 active peak threshold selected (ICC1,peak_2)  
Reserved  
4:0  
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
Notes  
1. The bit I_PEAK_TH can be modified in SBC Init and Normal Mode. In SBC Stop Mode this bit is Read only but  
SPI_FAIL will not be set when trying to modify the bit in SBC STOP Mode and no INT is triggered in case INT_  
GLOBAL is set.  
2. see Figure 26 for detailed state changes of CAN Transceiver for different SBC modes  
3. Failure Handling Mechanism: When the device enters Fail-Safe Mode due to a failure (TSD2, WD-Failure,...),  
then the wake registers , and WK_CTRL_2 are reset to following values (=wake sources) ‘xxx0 1001’, and ‘x0x0  
0111’ in order to ensure that the device can be woken again.  
Datasheet  
136  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
WK_CTRL_1  
Internal Wake Input Control (Address 000 0110B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: xx00 0000B  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIMER2_WK_ TIMER1_WK_  
WD_STM_  
EN_1  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
EN  
EN  
r
rw  
rw  
r
r
r
rwh  
r
r
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
TIMER2_WK 7  
_EN  
rw  
Timer2 Wake Source Control (for cyclic wake)  
0B , Timer2 wake disabled  
1B , Timer2 is enabled as a wake source  
TIMER1_WK 6  
_EN  
rw  
Timer1 Wake Source Control (for cyclic wake)  
0B , Timer1 wake disabled  
1B , Timer1 is enabled as a wake source  
Reserved  
5:3  
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
WD_STM_  
EN_1  
2
rwh  
Watchdog Deactivation during Stop Mode, bit 1  
(Chapter 15.2.4)  
0B , Watchdog is active in Stop Mode  
1B , Watchdog is deactivated in Stop Mode  
Reserved  
1:0  
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
Datasheet  
137  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
WK_CTRL_2  
External Wake Source Control (Address 000 0111B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0111B;  
Restart Value: x0x0 0xxxB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
INT_GLOBAL Reserved  
WK_MEAS  
Reserved  
Reserved  
WK3_EN  
WK2_EN  
WK1_EN  
w
r
rw  
r
rw  
r
r
rw  
rw  
rw  
Field  
INT_  
GLOBAL  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
7
rw  
Global Interrupt Configuration (see also Chapter 13.1)  
0B , Only wake sources trigger INT (default)  
1B , All status information register bits will trigger INT (including  
all wake sources)  
Reserved  
WK_MEAS  
6
5
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
rw  
WK / Measurement selection (see also Chapter 12.2.2)  
0B , WK functionality enabled for WK1 and WK2  
1B , Measurement functionality enabled; WK1 & WK2 are  
disabled as wake sources, i.e. bits WK1/2_EN bits are ignored  
Reserved  
WK3_EN  
4:3  
2
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
rw  
WK3 Wake Source Control  
0B , WK3 wake disabled  
1B , WK3 is enabled as a wake source  
WK2_EN  
WK1_EN  
1
0
rw  
rw  
WK2 Wake Source Control  
0B , WK2 wake disabled  
1B , WK2 is enabled as a wake source  
WK1 Wake Source Control  
0B , WK1 wake disabled  
1B , WK1 is enabled as a wake source  
Notes  
1. WK_MEAS is by default configured for standard WK functionality (WK1 and WK2). The bits WK1_EN and  
WK2_EN are ignored in case WK_MEAS is activated. If the bit is set to ‘1’ then the measurement function is  
enabled during Normal Mode & the bits WK1_EN and WK2_EN are ignored. The bits WK1/”_LVL bits need to be  
ignored as well.  
2. The wake sources LINx and CAN are selected in the register BUS_CTRL_1 by setting the respective bits to  
‘wake capable’  
3. Failure Handling Mechanism: When the device enters Fail-Safe Mode due to a failure (TSD2, WD-Failure,...),  
then the wake registers BUS_CTRL_1 and WK_CTRL_2 are reset to following values (=wake sources) ‘xxx0  
1001’ and ‘x0x0 0111’ in order to ensure that the device can be woken again.  
Datasheet  
138  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
WK_PUPD_CTRL  
Wake Input Level Control (Address 000 1000B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: 00xx xxxxB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved WK3_PUPD_1 WK3_PUPD_0 WK2_PUPD_1 WK2_PUPD_0 WK1_PUPD_1 WK1_PUPD_0  
r
r
r
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
Field  
Reserved  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
7:6  
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
WK3_PUPD 5:4  
WK2_PUPD 3:2  
WK1_PUPD 1:0  
rw  
WK3 Pull-Up / Pull-Down Configuration  
00B , No pull-up / pull-down selected  
01B , Pull-down resistor selected  
10B , Pull-up resistor selected  
11B , Automatic switching to pull-up or pull-down  
rw  
rw  
WK2 Pull-Up / Pull-Down Configuration  
00B , No pull-up / pull-down selected  
01B , Pull-down resistor selected  
10B , Pull-up resistor selected  
11B , Automatic switching to pull-up or pull-down  
WK1 Pull-Up / Pull-Down Configuration  
00B , No pull-up / pull-down selected  
01B , Pull-down resistor selected  
10B , Pull-up resistor selected  
11B , Automatic switching to pull-up or pull-down  
Datasheet  
139  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
WK_FLT_CTRL  
Wake Input Filter Time Control (Address 000 1001B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: 00xx xxxxB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
WK3_FLT_1 WK3_FLT_0 WK2_FLT_1 WK2_FLT_0 WK1_FLT_1 WK1_FLT_0  
r
r
r
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
Reserved  
WK3_FLT  
7:6  
5:4  
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
rw  
WK3 Filter Time Configuration  
00B , Configuration A: Filter with 16µs filter time (static sensing)  
01B , Configuration B: Filter with 64µs filter time (static sensing)  
10B , Configuration C: Filtering at the end of the on-time;  
a filter time of 16µs (cyclic sensing) is selected, Timer1  
11B , Configuration D: Filtering at the end of the on-time;  
a filter time of 16µs (cyclic sensing) is selected, Timer2  
WK2_FLT  
WK1_FLT  
3:2  
1:0  
rw  
rw  
WK2 Filter Time Configuration  
00B , Configuration A: Filter with 16µs filter time (static sensing)  
01B , Configuration B: Filter with 64µs filter time (static sensing)  
10B , Configuration C: Filtering at the end of the on-time;  
a filter time of 16µs (cyclic sensing) is selected, Timer1  
11B , Configuration D: Filtering at the end of the on-time;  
a filter time of 16µs (cyclic sensing) is selected, Timer2  
WK1 Filter Time Configuration  
00B , Configuration A: Filter with 16µs filter time (static sensing)  
01B , Configuration B: Filter with 64µs filter time (static sensing)  
10B , Configuration C: Filtering at the end of the on-time;  
a filter time of 16µs (cyclic sensing) is selected, Timer1  
11B , Configuration D: Filtering at the end of the on-time;  
a filter time of 16µs (cyclic sensing) is selected, Timer2  
Note:  
When selecting a filter time configuration, the user must make sure to also assign the respective  
timer to at least one HS switch during cyclic sense operation  
Datasheet  
140  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
TIMER1_CTRL  
Timer1 Control and Selection (Address 000 1100B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: 0000 0000B  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIMER1_  
ON_2  
TIMER1_  
ON_1  
TIMER1_  
ON_0  
TIMER1_  
PER_2  
TIMER1_  
PER_1  
TIMER1_  
PER_0  
Reserved  
Reserved  
r
r
rwh  
rwh  
rwh  
r
rwh  
rwh  
rwh  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
Reserved  
7
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
TIMER1_  
ON  
6:4  
rwh  
Timer1 On-Time Configuration  
000B , OFF / Low (timer not running, HSx output is low)  
001B , 0.1ms on-time  
010B , 0.3ms on-time  
011B , 1.0ms on-time  
100B , 10ms on-time  
101B , 20ms on-time  
110B , OFF / HIGH (timer not running, HSx output is high)  
111B , reserved  
Reserved  
3
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
TIMER1_  
PER  
2:0  
rwh  
Timer1 Period Configuration  
000B , 10ms  
001B , 20ms  
010B , 50ms  
011B , 100ms  
100B , 200ms  
101B , 1s  
110B , 2s  
111B , reserved  
Notes  
1. A timer must be first assigned and is then automatically activated as soon as the on-time is configured.  
2. If cyclic sense is selected and the HS switches are cleared during SBC Restart Mode, then also the timer  
settings (period and on-time) are cleared to avoid incorrect switch detection.  
3. In case the timer are set as wake sources and cyclic sense is running, then both cyclic sense and cyclic wake  
will be active at the same time.  
Datasheet  
141  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
TIMER2_CTRL  
Timer2 Control and selection (Address 000 1101B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: 0000 0000B  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIMER2_  
ON_2  
TIMER2_  
ON_1  
TIMER2_  
ON_0  
TIMER2_  
PER_2  
TIMER2_  
PER_1  
TIMER2_  
PER_0  
Reserved  
Reserved  
r
r
rwh  
rwh  
rwh  
r
rwh  
rwh  
rwh  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
Reserved  
7
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
TIMER2_  
ON  
6:4  
rwh  
Timer2 On-Time Configuration  
000B , OFF / Low (timer not running, HSx output is low)  
001B , 0.1ms on-time  
010B , 0.3ms on-time  
011B , 1.0ms on-time  
100B , 10ms on-time  
101B , 20ms on-time  
110B , OFF / HIGH (timer not running, HSx output is high)  
111B , reserved  
Reserved  
3
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
TIMER2_  
PER  
2:0  
rwh  
Timer2 Period Configuration  
000B , 10ms  
001B , 20ms  
010B , 50ms  
011B , 100ms  
100B , 200ms  
101B , 1s  
110B , 2s  
111B , reserved  
Notes  
1. A timer must be first assigned and is then automatically activated as soon as the on-time is configured.  
2. If cyclic sense is selected and the HS switches are cleared during SBC Restart Mode, then also the timer  
settings (period and on-time) are cleared to avoid incorrect switch detection.  
Datasheet  
142  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
SW_SD_CTRL  
Switch Shutdown Control (Address 001 0000B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: 0xxx 0000B  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
HS_OV_SD_E HS_UV_SD_E HS_OV_UV_R  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
N
N
EC  
r
r
rw  
rw  
rw  
r
r
r
r
Field  
Bits  
7
Type  
Description  
Reserved  
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
HS_OV_SD_  
EN  
6
rw  
Shutdown Disabling of HS1...4 in case of VSHS OV  
0B , shutdown enabled in case of VSHS OV  
1B , shutdown disabled in case of VSHS OV  
HS_UV_SD_  
EN  
5
4
rw  
rw  
Shutdown Disabling of HS1...4 in case of VSHS UV  
0B , shutdown enabled in case of VSHS UV  
1B , shutdown disabled in case of VSHS UV  
HS_OV_UV_  
REC  
Switch Recovery after Removal of VSHS OV/UV for HS1...4  
0B , Switch recovery is disabled  
1B , Previous state before VSHS OV/UV is enabled after OV/UV  
condition is removed  
Reserved  
3:0  
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
Datasheet  
143  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
HS_CTRL1  
High-Side Switch Control 1 (Address 001 0100B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: 0000 0000B  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
HS2_2  
HS2_1  
HS2_0  
Reserved  
HS1_2  
HS1_1  
HS1_0  
r
rw  
rwh  
rwh  
rwh  
r
rwh  
rwh  
rwh  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
Reserved  
HS2  
7
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
6:4  
rwh  
HS2 Configuration  
000B , Off  
001B , On  
010B , Controlled by Timer1  
011B , Controlled by Timer2  
100B , Controlled by PWM1  
101B , Controlled by PWM2  
110B , Reserved  
111B , Reserved  
Reserved  
HS1  
3
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
2:0  
rwh  
HS1 Configuration  
000B , Off  
001B , On  
010B , Controlled by Timer1  
011B , Controlled by Timer2  
100B , Controlled by PWM1  
101B , Controlled by PWM2  
110B , Reserved  
111B , Reserved  
Note:  
The bits for the switches are also reset in case of overcurrent and overtemperature.  
Datasheet  
144  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
HS_CTRL2  
High-Side Switch Control 2 (Address 001 0101B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: 0000 0000B  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
HS4_2  
HS4_1  
HS4_0  
Reserved  
HS3_2  
HS3_1  
HS3_0  
r
r
rwh  
rwh  
rwh  
r
rwh  
rwh  
rwh  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
Reserved  
HS4  
7
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
6:4  
rwh  
HS4 Configuration  
000B , Off  
001B , On  
010B , Controlled by Timer1  
011B , Controlled by Timer2  
100B , Controlled by PWM1  
101B , Controlled by PWM2  
110B , Reserved  
111B , Reserved  
Reserved  
HS3  
3
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
2:0  
rwh  
HS3 Configuration  
000B , Off  
001B , On  
010B , Controlled by Timer1  
011B , Controlled by Timer2  
100B , Controlled by PWM1  
101B , Controlled by PWM2  
110B , Reserved  
111B , Reserved  
Note:  
The bits for the switches are also reset in case of overcurrent and overtemperature.  
Datasheet  
145  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
GPIO_CTRL  
GPIO Configuration Control (Address 001 0111B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FO_DC_1  
FO_DC_0  
GPIO2_2  
GPIO2_1  
GPIO2_0  
GPIO1_2  
GPIO1_1  
GPIO1_0  
r
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
FO_DC  
7:6  
rw  
Duty Cycle Configuration of FO3 (if selected)  
00B , 20%  
01B , 10%  
10B , 5%  
11B , 2.5%  
GPIO2  
5:3  
rw  
GPIO2 Configuration  
000B , FO3 selected  
001B , FO3 selected  
010B , FO3 selected  
011B , FO3 selected  
100B , OFF  
101B , Wake input enabled (16µs static filter)  
110B , Low-Side Switch ON  
111B , High-Side Switch ON  
GPIO1  
2:0  
rw  
GPIO1 Configuration  
000B , FO2 selected  
001B , FO2 selected  
010B , FO2 selected  
011B , FO2 selected  
100B , OFF  
101B , Wake input enabled (16µs static filter)  
110B , Low-Side Switch ON  
111B , High-Side Switch ON  
Note:  
When selecting a filter time configuration, the user must make sure to also assign the respective  
timer to at least one HS switch during cyclic sense operation  
Datasheet  
146  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
PWM1_CTRL  
PWM1 Configuration Control (Address 001 1000B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PWM1_DC_7 PWM1_DC_6 PWM1_DC_5 PWM1_DC_4 PWM1_DC_3 PWM1_DC_2 PWM1_DC_1 PWM1_DC_0  
r
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
rw  
Description  
PWM1_DC  
7:0  
PWM1 Duty Cycle (bit0=LSB; bit7=MSB)  
0000 0000B, 100% OFF  
xxxx xxxx B, ON with DC fraction of 255  
1111 1111B, 100% ON  
Note:  
The min. On-time during PWM is limited by the actual Ton and Toff time of the respective HS switch,  
e.g. the PWM setting ‘000 0001’ could not be realized.  
PWM2_CTRL  
PWM2 Configuration Control (Address 001 1001B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PWM2_DC_7 PWM2_DC_6 PWM2_DC_5 PWM2_DC_4 PWM2_DC_3 PWM2_DC_2 PWM2_DC_1 PWM2_DC_0  
r
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
rw  
Description  
PWM2_DC  
7:0  
PWM2 Duty Cycle (bit0=LSB; bit7=MSB)  
0000 0000B, 100% OFF  
xxxx xxxxB, ON with DC fraction of 255  
1111 1111B, 100% ON  
Note:  
The min. On-time during PWM is limited by the actual Ton and Toff time of the respective HS switch,  
e.g. the PWM setting ‘000 0001’ could not be realized.  
Datasheet  
147  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
PWM_FREQ_CTRL  
PWM Frequency Configuration Control (Address 001 1100B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: 0000 0x0xB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved PWM2_FREQ Reserved PWM1_FREQ  
r
r
r
r
r
r
rw  
r
rw  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
Reserved  
7:3  
2
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
PWM2_  
FREQ  
rw  
PWM2 Frequency Selection  
0B , 200Hz configuration  
1B , 400Hz configuration  
Reserved  
1
0
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
PWM1_  
FREQ  
rw  
PWM1 Frequency Selection  
0B , 200Hz configuration  
1B , 400Hz configuration  
Notes  
1. The min. On-time during PWM is limited by the actual Ton and Toff time of the respective HS switch, e.g. the  
PWM setting ‘000 0001’ could not be realized.  
2. The actual PWM frequency correlates with the internal clock tolerance as specified in parameter fCLKSBC  
.
Datasheet  
148  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
SYS_STATUS_CTRL  
System Status Control (Address 001 1110B)  
POR Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value/Soft Reset Value: xxxx xxxxB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SYS_STAT_7 SYS_STAT_6 SYS_STAT_5 SYS_STAT_4 SYS_STAT_3 SYS_STAT_2 SYS_STAT_1 SYS_STAT_0  
r
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
rw  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
rw  
Description  
SYS_STAT  
7:0  
System Status Control Byte (bit0=LSB; bit7=MSB)  
Dedicated byte for system configuration, access only by  
microcontroller. Cleared after power up and Soft Reset  
Notes  
1. The SYS_STATUS_CTRL register is an exception for the default values, i.e. it will keep its configured value also  
after a Soft Reset.  
2. This byte is intended for storing system configurations of the ECU by the microcontroller and is only accessible  
in SBC Normal Mode. The byte is not accessible by the SBC and is also not cleared after Fail-Safe or SBC  
Restart Mode. It allows the microcontroller to quickly store system configuration without loosing the data.  
Datasheet  
149  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
16.6  
SPI Status Information Registers  
READ/CLEAR Operation (see also Chapter 16.3):  
One 16-bit SPI command consist of two bytes:  
- the 7-bit address and one additional bit for the register access mode and  
- following the data byte  
The numbering of following bit definitions refers to the data byte and correspond to the bits D0...D7 and to  
the SPI bits 8...15 (see also figure).  
There are two different bit types:  
- ‘r’ = READ: read only bits (or reserved bits)  
- ‘rc’ = READ/CLEAR: readable and clearable bits  
Reading a register is done byte wise by setting the SPI bit 7 to “0” (= Read Only)  
Clearing a register is done byte wise by setting the SPI bit 7 to “1”  
SPI status registers are in general not cleared or changed automatically (an exception are the WD_FAIL  
bits). This must be done by the microcontroller via SPI command  
The registers are addressed wordwise.  
Datasheet  
150  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
16.6.1  
General Status Registers  
SUP_STAT_2  
Supply Voltage Fail Status (Address 100 0000B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: 0x0x xxxxB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
VS_UV  
Reserved  
VCC3_OC  
VCC3_UV  
VCC3_OT  
VCC1_OV  
VCC1_WARN  
r
r
rc  
r
rc  
rc  
rc  
rc  
rc  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
Reserved  
VS_UV  
7
6
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
rc  
VS Undervoltage Detection (VS,UV)  
0B , No VS undervoltage detected  
1B , VS undervoltage detected  
Reserved  
VCC3_OC  
5
4
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
rc  
VCC3 Overcurrent Detection  
0B , No OC  
1B , OC detected  
VCC3_UV  
VCC3_OT  
3
2
1
0
rc  
rc  
rc  
rc  
VCC3 Undervoltage Detection  
0B , No VCC3 UV detection  
1B , VCC3 UV Fail detected  
VCC3 Overtemperature Detection  
0B , No overtemperature  
1B , VCC3 overtemperature detected  
VCC1_  
OV  
VCC1 Overvoltage Detection (VCC1,OV,r  
0B , No VCC1 overvoltage warning  
1B , VCC1 overvoltage detected  
)
VCC1_  
WARN  
VCC1 Undervoltage Prewarning (VPW,f  
0B , No VCC1 undervoltage prewarning  
1B , VCC1 undervoltage prewarning detected  
)
Notes  
1. The VCC1 undervoltage prewarning threshold VPW,f / VPW,r is a fixed threshold and independent of the VCC1  
undervoltage reset thresholds.  
Datasheet  
151  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
SUP_STAT_1  
Supply Voltage Fail Status (Address 100 0001B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: y000 0000B;  
Restart Value: xxxx xx0xB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
POR  
VSHS_UV  
VSHS_OV  
VCC2_OT  
VCC2_UV  
VCC1_SC VCC1_UV_FS VCC1_UV  
r
rc  
rc  
rc  
rc  
rc  
rc  
rc  
rc  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
POR  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
rc  
rc  
rc  
rc  
rc  
rc  
rc  
rc  
Power-On Reset Detection  
0B , No POR  
1B , POR occurred  
VSHS_UV  
VSHS_OV  
VCC2_OT  
VCC2_UV  
VCC1_SC  
VSHS Undervoltage Detection (VSHS,UVD  
0B , No VSHS-UV  
1B , VSHS-UV detected  
)
VSHS Overvoltage Detection (VSHS,OVD  
0B , No VSHS-OV  
1B , VSHS-OV detected  
)
VCC2 Overtemperature Detection  
0B , No overtemperature  
1B , VCC2 overtemperature detected  
VCC2 Undervoltage Detection (VCC2,UV,f  
0B , No VCC2 undervoltage  
1B , VCC2 undervoltage detected  
)
VCC1 Short to GND Detection (<Vrtx for t>4ms after switch on)  
0B , No short  
1B , VCC1 short to GND detected  
VCC1_UV  
_FS  
VCC1 UV-Detection (due to Vrtx reset)  
0B , No Fail-Safe Mode entry due to 4th consecutive VCC1_UV  
1B , Fail-Safe Mode entry due to 4th consecutive VCC1_UV  
VCC1_UV  
VCC1 UV-Detection (due to Vrtx reset)  
0B , No VCC1_UV detection  
1B , VCC1 UV-Fail detected  
Notes  
1. The MSB of the POR/Soft Reset value is marked as ‘y’: the default value of the POR bit is set after Power-on  
reset (POR value = 1000 0000). However it will be cleared after a SBC Soft Reset command (Soft Reset value =  
0000 0000).  
2. During Sleep Mode, the bits VCC1_SC,VCC1_OV and VCC1_UV will not be set when VCC1 is off  
3. The VCC1_UV bit is never updated in SBC Restart Mode, in SBC Init Mode it is only updated after RO was  
released for the first time, it is always updated in SBC Normal and Stop Mode, and it is always updated in any  
SBC modes in a VCC1_SC condition (after VCC1_UV = 1 for >4ms).  
Datasheet  
152  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
THERM_STAT  
Thermal Protection Status (Address 100 0010B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: 0000 0xxxB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
TSD2  
TSD1  
TPW  
r
r
r
r
r
r
rc  
rc  
rc  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
Reserved  
TSD2  
7:3  
2
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
rc  
TSD2 Thermal Shut-Down Detection  
0B , No TSD2 event  
1B , TSD2 OT detected - leading to SBC Fail-Safe Mode  
TSD1  
TPW  
1
0
rc  
rc  
TSD1 Thermal Shut-Down Detection  
0B , No TSD1 fail  
1B , TSD1 OT detected  
Thermal Pre Warning  
0B , No Thermal Pre warning  
1B , Thermal Pre warning detected  
Note:  
TSD1 and TSD2 are not reset automatically, even if the temperature pre warning or TSD1 OT  
condition is not present anymore. Also TSD2 is not reset.  
Datasheet  
153  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
DEV_STAT  
Device Information Status (Address 100 0011B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: xx00 xxxxB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DEV_STAT_1 DEV_STAT_0 Reserved  
rc rc  
Reserved  
WD_FAIL_1 WD_FAIL_0  
rh rh  
SPI_FAIL  
FAILURE  
r
r
r
rc  
rc  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
DEV_STAT 7:6  
rc  
Device Status before Restart Mode  
00B , Cleared (Register must be actively cleared)  
01B , Restart due to failure (WD fail, TSD2, VCC1_UV); also after a  
wake from Fail-Safe Mode  
10B , Sleep Mode  
11B , Reserved  
Reserved  
WD_FAIL  
5:4  
3:2  
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
rh  
Number of WD-Failure Events (1/2 WD failures depending on  
CFG)  
00B , No WD Fail  
01B , 1x WD Fail, FOx activation - Config 2 selected  
10B , 2x WD Fail, FOx activation - Config 1 / 3 / 4 selected  
11B , Reserved (never reached)  
SPI_FAIL  
FAILURE  
1
0
rc  
rc  
SPI Fail Information  
0B , No SPI fail  
1B , Invalid SPI command detected  
Activation of Fail Output FO  
0B , No Failure  
1B , Failure occurred  
Notes  
1. The bits DEV_STAT show the status of the device before it went through Restart. Either the device came from  
regular Sleep Mode (‘10’) or a failure (‘01’ - SBC Restart or SBC Fail-Safe Mode: WD fail, TSD2 fail, VCC_UV fail  
or VCC1_OV if bit VCC1_OV_RST is set) occurred. Failure is also an illegal command from SBC Stop to SBC  
Sleep Mode or going to SBC Sleep Mode without activation of any wake source. Coming from SBC Sleep Mode  
(‘10’) will also be shown if there was a trial to enter SBC Sleep Mode without having cleared all wake flags  
before.  
2. The WD_FAIL bits are configured as a counter and are the only status bits, which are cleared automatically  
by the SBC. They are cleared after a successful watchdog trigger and when the watchdog is stopped (also in  
SBC Sleep and Fail-Safe Mode unless it was reached due to a watchdog failure). See also Chapter 14.1.  
3. The SPI_FAIL bit is cleared only by SPI command  
4. In case of Config 2/4 the WD_Fail counter is frozen in case of WD trigger failure until a successful WD trigger.  
5. If CFG = ‘0’ then a 1st watchdog failure will not trigger the FO outputs or the FAILURE bit but only force the SBC  
into SBC Restart Mode.  
Datasheet  
154  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
BUS_STAT_1  
Bus Communication Status (Address 100 0100B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: 0xx0 0xxxB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved LIN1_FAIL_1 LIN1_FAIL_0 Reserved  
Reserved  
CAN_FAIL_1 CAN_FAIL_0  
VCAN_UV  
r
r
rc  
rc  
r
r
rc  
rc  
rc  
Field  
Bits  
7
Type  
Description  
Reserved  
LIN1_FAIL  
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
6:5  
rc  
LIN1 Failure Status  
00B , No error  
01B , LIN1 TSD  
10B , LIN1_TXD_DOM: TXD dominant time out for more than 20ms  
11B , LIN1_BUS_DOM: BUS dominant time out for more than  
20ms  
Reserved  
CAN_FAIL  
4:3  
2:1  
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
rc  
CAN Failure Status  
00B , No error  
01B , CAN TSD  
10B , CAN_TXD_DOM: TXD dominant time out for longer than  
tTxD_CAN_TO  
11B , CAN_BUS_DOM: BUS dominant time out for longer than  
tBUS_CAN_TO  
VCAN_UV  
Notes  
0
rc  
Undervoltage CAN Bus Supply  
0B , Normal operation  
1B , CAN Supply undervoltage detected. Transmitter disabled  
1. The VCAN_UV comparator is enabled if the mode bit CAN_1 = ‘1’, i.e. in CAN Normal or CAN Receive Only Mode.  
Datasheet  
155  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
WK_STAT_1  
Wake-up Source and Information Status (Address 100 0110B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: 0xxx 0xxxB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
LIN1_WU  
CAN_WU  
TIMER_WU  
Reserved  
WK3_WU  
WK2_WU  
WK1_WU  
r
r
rc  
rc  
rc  
r
rc  
rc  
rc  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
Reserved  
LIN1_WU  
7
6
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
rc  
Wake up via LIN1 Bus  
0B , No Wake up  
1B , Wake up  
CAN_WU  
5
4
rc  
rc  
Wake up via CAN Bus  
0B , No Wake up  
1B , Wake up  
TIMER_WU  
Wake up via TimerX  
0B , No Wake up  
1B , Wake up  
Reserved  
WK3_WU  
3
2
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
rc  
Wake up via WK3  
0B , No Wake up  
1B , Wake up  
WK2_WU  
WK1_WU  
1
0
rc  
rc  
Wake up via WK2  
0B , No Wake up  
1B , Wake up  
Wake up via WK1  
0B , No Wake up  
1B , Wake up  
Note:  
The respective wake source bit will also be set when the device is woken from SBC Fail-Safe Mode  
Datasheet  
156  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
WK_STAT_2  
Wake-up Source and Information Status (Address 100 0111B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: 00xx 0000B  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
GPIO2_WU GPIO1_WU  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
r
r
r
rc  
rc  
r
r
r
r
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
Reserved  
7:6  
5
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
GPIO2_WU  
rc  
Wake up via GPIO2  
0B , No Wake up  
1B , Wake up  
GPIO1_WU  
Reserved  
4
rc  
r
Wake up via GPIO1  
0B , No Wake up  
1B , Wake up  
3:0  
Reserved, always reads as 0  
Datasheet  
157  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
WK_LVL_STAT  
WK Input Level (Address 100 1000B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: xx00 0xxxB;  
Restart Value: xxxx 0xxxB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SBC_DEV  
_LVL  
CFGP  
GPIO2_LVL GPIO1_LVL  
Reserved  
WK3_LVL  
WK2_LVL  
WK1_LVL  
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
SBC_DEV  
_LVL  
7
6
5
4
r
Status of SBC Operating Mode at FO3/TEST Pin  
0B , User Mode activated  
1B , SBC Development Mode activated  
CFGP  
r
r
r
Device Configuration Status  
0B , No external pull-up resistor connected on INT (Config 2/4)  
1B , External pull-up resistor connected on INT (Config 1/3)  
GPIO2_LVL  
GPIO1_LVL  
Status of GPIO2 (if selected as GPIO)  
0B , Low Level (=0)  
1B , High Level (=1)  
Status of GPIO1 (if selected as GPIO)  
0B , Low Level (=0)  
1B , High Level (=1)  
Reserved  
WK3_LVL  
3
2
r
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
Status of WK3  
0B , Low Level (=0)  
1B , High Level (=1)  
WK2_LVL  
WK1_LVL  
1
0
r
r
Status of WK2  
0B , Low Level (=0)  
1B , High Level (=1)  
Status of WK1  
0B , Low Level (=0)  
1B , High Level (=1)  
Note:  
GPIOx_LVL is updated in SBC Normal and Stop Mode if configured as wake input, low-side switch or  
high-side switch.  
In cyclic sense or wake mode, the registers contain the sampled level, i.e. the registers are updated  
after every sampling. The GPIOs are not capable of cyclic sensing.  
If selected as GPIO then the respective level is shown even if configured as low-side or high-side.  
Datasheet  
158  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
HS_OC_OT_STAT  
High-Side Switch Overload Status (Address 101 0100B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: 0000 xxxxB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
HS4_OC_OT HS3_OC_OT HS2_OC_OT HS1_OC_OT  
r
r
r
r
r
rc  
rc  
rc  
rc  
Field  
Reserved  
Bits  
7:4  
Type  
Description  
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
HS4_OC_OT 3  
HS3_OC_OT 2  
HS2_OC_OT 1  
HS1_OC_OT 0  
rc  
Overcurrent & Overtemperature Detection HS4  
0B , No OC or OT  
1B , OC or OT detected  
rc  
rc  
rc  
Overcurrent & Overtemperature Detection HS3  
0B , No OC or OT  
1B , OC or OT detected  
Overcurrent & Overtemperature Detection HS2  
0B , No OC or OT  
1B , OC or OT detected  
Overcurrent & Overtemperature Detection HS1  
0B , No OC or OT  
1B , OC or OT detected  
Note:  
The OC/OT bit might be set for VPOR,f < VS < 5.5V (see also Chapter 4.2)  
Datasheet  
159  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
HS_OL_STAT  
High-Side Switch Open-Load Status (Address 101 0101B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B;  
Restart Value: 0000 xxxxB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
HS4_OL  
HS3_OL  
HS2_OL  
HS1_OL  
r
r
r
r
r
rc  
rc  
rc  
rc  
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
Reserved  
HS4_OL  
7:4  
3
r
Reserved, always reads as 0  
rc  
Open-Load Detection HS4  
0B , No OL  
1B , OL detected  
HS3_OL  
HS2_OL  
HS1_OL  
2
1
0
rc  
rc  
rc  
Open-Load Detection HS3  
0B , No OL  
1B , OL detected  
Open-Load Detection HS2  
0B , No OL  
1B , OL detected  
Open-Load Detection HS1  
0B , No OL  
1B , OL detected  
Datasheet  
160  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
16.6.2  
Family and Product Information Register  
FAM_PROD_STAT  
Family and Product Identification Register (Address 111 1110B)  
POR / Soft Reset Value: 0111 yyyy B; Restart Value: 0111 yyyyB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FAM_3  
FAM_2  
FAM_1  
FAM_0  
PROD_3  
PROD_2  
PROD_1  
PROD_0  
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
Field  
Bits  
Type  
Description  
FAM  
7:4  
r
SBC Family Identifier (bit4=LSB; bit7=MSB)  
0 010B, DC/DC-SBC Family  
0 011B, Mid-Range SBC Family  
0 100B, Multi-CAN SBC Family  
0 101B, Lite-CAN SBC Family  
0 111B, Mid-Range+ SBC Family  
x x x xB, reserved for future products  
PROD  
3:0  
r
SBC Product Identifier (bit0=LSB; bit3=MSB)  
0 0 0 0B, reserved  
0 1 0 0B, TLE9261BQX (VCC1 = 5V, no LIN, VCC3, no SWK)  
1 0 0 0B, TLE9262BQX (VCC1 = 5V, 1 LIN, VCC3, no SWK)  
1 1 0 0B, TLE9263BQX (VCC1 = 5V, 2 LIN, VCC3, no SWK)  
Notes  
1. The actual default register value after POR, Soft Reset or Restart of PROD will depend on the respective  
product. Therefore the value ‘y’ is specified.  
2. SWK = Selective Wake feature in CAN Partial Networking standard  
Datasheet  
161  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
16.7  
Electrical Characteristics  
Table 30  
Electrical Characteristics  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V, Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C, all voltages with respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin  
(unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
Max.  
SPI frequency  
1)  
Maximum SPI frequency  
fSPI,max  
4.0  
MHz  
P_16.7.1  
SPI Interface; Logic Inputs SDI, CLK and CSN  
H-input Voltage Threshold  
L-input Voltage Threshold  
Hysteresis of input Voltage  
VIH  
0.7*  
VCC1  
V
V
V
P_16.7.2  
P_16.7.3  
P_16.7.4  
VIL  
0.3*  
VCC1  
1)  
VIHY  
0.08 × 0.12 × 0.5 ×  
VCC1  
VCC1  
VCC1  
Pull-up Resistance at pin CSN RICSN  
20  
40  
80  
kΩ  
kΩ  
VCSN = 0.7 x VCC1  
P_16.7.5  
P_16.7.6  
Pull-down Resistance at pin RICLK/SDI  
20  
40  
80  
VSDI/CLK =  
SDI and CLK  
0.2 x VCC1  
1)  
Input Capacitance at pin  
CSN, SDI or CLK  
CI  
10  
pF  
V
P_16.7.7  
P_16.7.8  
Logic Output SDO  
H-output Voltage Level  
VSDOH  
VCC1  
0.4  
-
VCC1  
0.2  
-
IDOH = -1.6 mA  
IDOL = 1.6 mA  
L-output Voltage Level  
Tristate Leakage Current  
VSDOL  
ISDOLK  
0.2  
0.4  
10  
V
P_16.7.9  
-10  
µA  
VCSN = VCC1  
;
P_16.7.10  
0 V < VDO < VCC1  
1)  
Tristate Input Capacitance  
Data Input Timing1)  
Clock Period  
CSDO  
10  
15  
pF  
P_16.7.11  
tpCLK  
tCLKH  
tCLKL  
tbef  
250  
125  
125  
125  
250  
250  
125  
100  
50  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
P_16.7.12  
P_16.7.13  
P_16.7.14  
P_16.7.15  
P_16.7.16  
P_16.7.17  
P_16.7.18  
P_16.7.19  
P_16.7.20  
P_16.7.21  
Clock High Time  
Clock Low Time  
Clock Low before CSN Low  
CSN Setup Time  
tlead  
tlag  
CLK Setup Time  
Clock Low after CSN High  
SDI Set-up Time  
tbeh  
tDISU  
tDIHO  
SDI Hold Time  
Input Signal Rise Time at pin trIN  
50  
SDI, CLK and CSN  
Datasheet  
162  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
Table 30  
Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)  
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V, Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C, all voltages with respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin  
(unless otherwise specified)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Values  
Typ.  
Unit Note or  
Test Condition  
Number  
Min.  
Max.  
Input Signal Fall Time at pin tfIN  
50  
ns  
P_16.7.22  
SDI, CLK and CSN  
Delay Time for Mode  
Changes2)  
tDel,Mode  
3
6
µs  
includes internal P_16.7.23  
oscillator  
tolerance  
CSN High Time  
tCSN(high)  
µs  
P_16.7.24  
Data Output Timing1)  
SDO Rise Time  
trSDO  
30  
30  
80  
80  
50  
50  
50  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
CL = 100 pF  
P_16.7.25  
P_16.7.26  
P_16.7.27  
SDO Fall Time  
tfSDO  
CL = 100 pF  
SDO Enable Time  
SDO Disable Time  
SDO Valid Time  
tENSDO  
tDISSDO  
tVASDO  
low impedance  
high impedance P_16.7.28  
CL = 100 pF  
P_16.7.29  
1) Not subject to production test; specified by design  
2) Applies to all mode changes triggered via SPI commands  
24  
CSN  
15  
16  
17  
18  
13  
14  
CLK  
SDI  
19  
20  
LSB  
MSB  
not defined  
27  
28  
29  
SDO  
Flag  
LSB  
MSB  
Figure 58 SPI Timing Diagram  
Note:  
Numbers in drawing correlate to the last 2 digits of the Number field in the Electrical Characteristics  
table.  
Datasheet  
163  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Application Information  
17  
Application Information  
17.1  
Application Diagram  
Note:  
The following information is given as a hint for the implementation of the device only and shall not  
be regarded as a description or warranty of a certain functionality, condition or quality of the device.  
VBAT  
T2  
VCC3  
VS  
R12  
D1  
VBAT  
C1  
C13  
D2  
C2  
Q1  
Q2  
Q1  
Q2  
IC1  
VCC  
C3  
C14  
GND  
R8  
VCC3REF  
VCC3SH  
VS  
VS  
VCC3B  
VSHS  
VSHS  
VCC1  
VCC1  
VCC2  
D3  
VCC2  
C5  
C7  
C4  
HS1  
HS2  
HS3  
R9  
C6  
VS  
VSHS  
VSHS  
C17  
CSN  
VDD  
CSN  
CLK  
SDI  
R7  
CLK  
SDI  
µC  
D4  
SDO  
SDO  
C18  
C8  
TxD LIN1  
RxD LIN1  
TxD LIN1  
RxD LIN1  
Other loads , e.g.  
sensor , opamp, ...  
LOGIC  
State  
Machine  
TxD CAN  
RxD CAN  
INT  
TxD CAN  
RxD CAN  
INT  
VSHS  
RO  
Reset  
Hall1  
Q1  
Q2  
HS4  
Hall2  
VSS  
VSHS  
R5  
R3  
D5  
R6  
R4  
TLE9262  
WK1  
WK2  
WK3  
R13  
S3  
LIN cell  
C9  
LIN1  
LIN1  
C15  
VBAT  
S2  
C10  
S1  
VCC2  
R2  
VCAN  
CANH  
C11  
R1  
CANH  
CANL  
CAN cell  
R10  
R11  
C12  
VS  
T1  
CANL  
FOx  
GND  
LH  
Note: The external capacitance on FO3/TEST must be  
<=10nF in oder to ensure proper detection of SBC  
Development Mode und SBC user mode operation  
Application _information  
_TLE9262 .vsd  
Figure 59 Simplified Application Diagram  
Datasheet  
164  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Application Information  
Note:  
Unused outputs are recommended to be left unconnected on the application board. If unused  
output pins are routed to an external connector which leaves the ECU, then these pins should have  
provision for a zero ohm jumper (depopulated if unused) or ESD protection.  
Table 31  
Ref.  
Bill of Material for Simplified Application Diagram  
Typical Value  
Purpose / Comment  
Capacitances  
C1  
C2  
C3  
68µF  
100nF  
22µF  
Buffering capacitor to cut off battery spikes, depending on application  
EMC, blocking capacitor  
Buffering capacitor to cut off battery spikes from VSHS as separate supply  
input; Depending on application, only needed if VSHS is not connected to  
VS;  
C4  
C5  
C6  
2.2µF low ESR  
100nF ceramic  
2.2µF low ESR  
As required by application, min. 470nF for stability and max. 68µF  
recommended  
Spike filtering, improve stability of supply for microcontroller;  
not needed for SBC  
Blocking capacitor, min. 470nF for stability;  
if used for CAN supply place a 100nF ceramic capacitor in addition very  
close to VCAN pin for optimum EMC behavior  
C7  
33nF  
33nF  
47pF  
47pF  
10nF  
As required by application, mandatory protection for off-board  
connections  
C8  
As required by application, mandatory protection for off-board  
connections  
C17  
C18  
C9  
Only required in case of off-board connection to optimize EMC behavior,  
place close to pin  
Only required in case of off-board connection to optimize EMC behavior,  
place close to pin  
Spike filtering, as required by application, mandatory protection for off-  
board connections (see also Simplified Application Diagram with the  
Alternate Measurement Function)  
C10  
C11  
10nF  
10nF  
Spike filtering, as required by application, mandatory protection for off-  
board connections  
Spike filtering, as required by application, mandatory protection for off-  
board connections  
C12  
C13  
4.7nF / OEM dependent Split termination stability  
10µF low ESR  
Stability of VCC3, ceramic capacitor, e.g. Murata 10 µF/10 V  
GCM31CR71A106K64L or 2x 4.7 µF/10 V  
C14  
C15  
47nF  
Only required in case of off-board connection to optimize EMC behavior,  
place close to connector  
1nF / OEM dependent  
LIN master termination  
Resistances  
R1  
R2  
10kΩ  
10kΩ  
Wetting current of the switch, as required by application  
Limit the WK pin current, e.g. for ISO pulses  
Datasheet  
165  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Application Information  
Table 31  
Ref.  
R3  
Bill of Material for Simplified Application Diagram (cont’d)  
Typical Value  
10kΩ  
Purpose / Comment  
Wetting current of the switch, as required by application  
Limit the WK pin current, e.g. for ISO pulses  
Wetting current of the switch, as required by application  
Limit the WK pin current, e.g. for ISO pulses  
R4  
10kΩ  
R5  
10kΩ  
R6  
10kΩ  
R7  
depending on LED config. LED current limitation, as required by application  
depending on LED config. LED current limitation, as required by application  
R8  
R9  
47kΩ  
Selection of hardware configuration 1/3, i.e. in case of WD failure SBC  
Restart Mode is entered.  
If not connected, then hardware configuration 2/4 is selected  
R10  
R11  
R12  
60/ OEM dependent  
60/ OEM dependent  
CAN bus termination  
CAN bus termination  
1shunt, depending on Sense shunt for ICC3 current limitation (configured to typ. 235mA with 1Ω  
required current shunt) for stand-alone configuration;  
limitation or load sharing Setting of load sharing ratio (here ICC3/ICC1 = 1) in load sharing  
ratio  
configuration.  
R13  
R15  
1k/ OEM dependent  
10kΩ  
LIN master termination (if configured as a LIN master)  
WK1 pin current limitation, e.g. for ISO pulses, for alternate measurement  
function (see also Simplified Application Diagram with the Alternate  
Measurement Function)  
R16  
R17  
depending on  
application and  
microcontroller  
Voltage Divider resistor to adjust measurement voltage to  
microcontroller ADC input range (see also Simplified Application Diagram  
with the Alternate Measurement Function)  
depending on  
application and  
microcontroller  
Voltage Divider resistor to adjust measurement voltage to  
microcontroller ADC input range (see also Simplified Application Diagram  
with the Alternate Measurement Function)  
Active Components  
D1  
D2  
e.g. BAS 3010A, Infineon Reverse polarity protection for VS supply pins  
e.g. BAS 3010A, Infineon Reverse polarity protection for VSHS supply pin; if separate supplies are  
not needed, then connect VSHS to VS pins  
D3  
D4  
D5  
T1  
T2  
LED  
As required by application, configure series resistor accordingly  
As required by application, configure series resistor accordingly  
Requested by LIN standard; reverse polarity protection of network  
High active FO control  
LED  
e.g. BAS70  
e.g. BCR191W  
BCP 52-16, Infineon  
Power element of VCC3, current limit or load sharing ratio to be  
configured via shunt  
MJD 253, ON Semi  
e.g. TC2xxx  
Alternative power element of VCC3  
Microcontroller  
µC  
Note:  
This is a simplified example of an application circuit. The function must be verified in the real  
application.  
Datasheet  
166  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Application Information  
VBAT  
VS  
D1  
VBAT  
C2  
C1  
D2  
e.g.  
470uF  
VS  
VCC1  
VCC1  
CSN  
C5  
C4  
VS  
VDD  
CSN  
CLK  
SDI  
SDO  
CLK  
SDI  
µC  
SDO  
TxD LIN1  
TxD LIN1  
RxD LIN1  
RxD LIN1  
LOGIC  
State  
Machine  
TxD CAN  
RxD CAN  
TxD CAN  
RxD CAN  
INT  
RO  
INT  
Reset  
ADC_x  
Vbat_uC  
TLE9262  
max.  
500uA  
R6  
WK1  
VSS  
10k  
C9  
10n  
ISO Pulse  
protection  
S1  
WK2  
Note:  
Vbat_uC  
R17  
Max. WK1 input current limited to  
500µA to ensure accuracy and  
proper operation ;  
R16  
GND  
Figure 60 Simplified Application Diagram with the Alternate Measurement Function via WK1 and WK2  
Note:  
This is a very simplified example of an application circuit. The function must be verified in the real  
application.WK1 must be connected to signal to be measured and WK2 is the output to the  
microcontroller supervision function. The maximum current into WK1 must be <500uA. The  
minimum current into WK1 should be >5uA to ensure proper operation.  
Datasheet  
167  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Application Information  
5V_int  
SBC Init  
Mode  
T test  
RTEST  
Connector/  
Jumper  
FO3/  
TEST  
REXT  
T FO_PL  
Failure Logic  
Figure 61 Hint for Increasing the Robustness of pin FO3/TEST during Debugging or Programming  
Datasheet  
168  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Application Information  
17.2  
ESD Tests  
Note:  
Tests for ESD robustness according to IEC61000-4-2 “gun test” (150pF, 330) has been performed.  
The results and test conditions are available in a test report. The target values for the test are listed  
in Table 32 below.  
Table 32  
ESD “Gun Test”  
Performed Test  
Result  
Unit  
Remarks  
1)2)positive pulse  
ESD at pin CANH, CANL,  
LIN, VS, WK1..3, HSx, VCC2,  
VCC3 versus GND  
>6  
kV  
ESD at pin CANH, CANL,  
LIN, VS, WK1..3, HSx, VCC2,  
VCC3 versus GND  
< -6  
kV  
1)2)negative pulse  
1) ESD Test “Gun Test” is specified with external components for pins VS, WK1..3, HSx, VCC3 and VCC2. See the  
application diagram in Chapter 17.1 for more information.  
2) ESD susceptibility “ESD GUN” according LIN EMC 1.3 Test Specification, Section 4.3 (IEC 61000-4-2). Tested by external  
test house (IBEE Zwickau, EMC Test report Nr. 04-01-17)  
EMC and ESD susceptibility tests according to SAE J2962-2 (2010) have been performed. Tested by external  
test house (UL LLC).  
Datasheet  
169  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Application Information  
17.3  
Thermal Behavior of Package  
Below figure shows the thermal resistance (Rth_JA) of the device vs. the cooling area on the bottom of the PCB  
for Ta = 85°C. Every line reflects a different PCB and thermal via design.  
Figure 62 Thermal Resistance (Rth_JA) vs. Cooling Area  
Datasheet  
170  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Application Information  
Cross Section(JEDEC 2s2p) with Cooling Area  
Cross Section(JEDEC 1s0p) with Cooling Area  
70µm modelled(traces)  
35µm, 90% metalization*  
35µm, 90% metalization*  
70µm / 5% metalization+ cooling area  
*: means percentualCu metalization on each layer  
PCB (top view)  
PCB (bottom view)  
Detail SolderArea  
Figure 63 Board Setup  
Board setup is defined according to JESD 51-2,-5,-7.  
Board: 76.2x114.3x1.5mm3 with 2 inner copper layers (35µm thick), with thermal via array under the exposed  
pad contacting the first inner copper layer and 300mm2 cooling area on the bottom layer (70µm).  
Datasheet  
171  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Package Outlines  
18  
Package Outlines  
Figure 64 PG-VQFN-48 1)  
The PG-VQFN-48 package is a leadless exposed pad power package featuring Lead Tip Inspection (LTI) to  
support Automatic Optical Inspection (AOI).  
Green Product (RoHS compliant)  
To meet the world-wide customer requirements for environmentally friendly products and to be compliant  
with government regulations the device is available as a green product. Green products are RoHS-Compliant  
(i.e Pb-free finish on leads and suitable for Pb-free soldering according to IPC/JEDEC J-STD-020).  
Further information on packages  
https://www.infineon.com/packages  
1) Dimensions in mm  
Datasheet  
172  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Revision History  
19  
Revision History  
Revision Date  
Changes  
Rev. 1.2 2022-05-04 Datasheet updated:  
Editorial changes  
Updated package outline drawing  
P_15.10.26: Updated max value of VPOR,r to 4.7 V  
Updated Ipeak parameter (P_6.3.13, P_6.3.17, P_6.3.18, P_6.3.19, P_7.3.15,  
P_7.3.17)  
P_4.1.27: parameter VCAN_Diff,max improved to -40V min. and 40V max.  
P_4.1.3: parameter VCC1,max: added Note/Testconditions  
Table 4 footnote 7): corrected 18µA to 20µA to match with parameter values  
Corrected note 2 at CAN wake capable mode: must not -> not need to  
Corrected POR/Soft Reset value of FAM_PROD_STAT register. No product  
change  
Added note about clock tolerance at PWM_FREQ_CTRL register description  
Pin configuration (Chapter 3): Improved Cooling tab description - connect the  
exposed pad to GND  
Updated CDM specification reference to JS-002  
Improved wording of Table 5. No product change.  
Added explaining footnote to parameter tLW (P_15.10.24). No product change.  
Added current consumption for GPIOx in Highside/Lowside switch confguration  
in SBC Stop/Sleep mode (P_4.4.37 and P_4.4.38). No product change.  
Added “not subject to production test” footnote to tCFG_F (P_13.2.6)  
Two definitions for VCC1 voltage drop were available. Apply P_6.3.3 to 3.3V  
variant only, and P_6.3.4 to 5V variant only. No product change.  
Datasheet  
173  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
OPTIREG™ SBC TLE9262BQX  
Revision History  
Revision Date  
Changes  
Rev. 1.1 2019-09-27 Datasheet updated:  
Editorial changes  
General: added ISO 17987-4 to LIN 2.2  
Updated Table 4  
corrected footnote 9) to match P_4.4.33, i.e changed 525µA to 550µA  
Chapter 5.1.4 “SBC Sleep Mode”: added condition for CAN mode handling  
before SBC Sleep Mode entry  
Figure 3 “State Diagram ...”: added footnote with condition for CAN mode  
handling before SBC Sleep Mode entry  
Figure 26 “CAN Mode Control Diagram”: added Footnote 2) with condition for  
CAN mode handling before SBC Sleep Mode entry  
Updated Table 17  
added P_10.3.57 and P_10.3.58 (no product change)  
added P_10.3.59, P_10.3.60, P_10.3.61 and P_10.3.62  
tightened P_10.3.16  
tightened P_10.3.39 and P_10.3.40 by additional footnote  
Figure 10.2.4 “CAN Wake Capable Mode”, rearming the transceiver for wake  
capability: added condition for CAN mode handling before SBC Sleep Mode  
entry  
Rev. 1.0 2017-07-31 Initial Release  
Datasheet  
174  
Rev. 1.2  
2022-05-04  
Trademarks  
All referenced product or service names and trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
IMPORTANT NOTICE  
The information given in this document shall in no For further information on technology, delivery terms  
Edition 2022-05-04  
Published by  
Infineon Technologies AG  
81726 Munich, Germany  
event be regarded as a guarantee of conditions or and conditions and prices, please contact the nearest  
characteristics ("Beschaffenheitsgarantie").  
Infineon Technologies Office (www.infineon.com).  
With respect to any examples, hints or any typical  
values stated herein and/or any information regarding  
the application of the product, Infineon Technologies  
hereby disclaims any and all warranties and liabilities  
of any kind, including without limitation warranties of  
non-infringement of intellectual property rights of any  
third party.  
In addition, any information given in this document is  
subject to customer's compliance with its obligations  
stated in this document and any applicable legal  
requirements, norms and standards concerning  
customer's products and any use of the product of  
Infineon Technologies in customer's applications.  
The data contained in this document is exclusively  
intended for technically trained staff. It is the  
responsibility of customer's technical departments to  
evaluate the suitability of the product for the intended  
application and the completeness of the product  
information given in this document with respect to  
such application.  
WARNINGS  
Due to technical requirements products may contain  
dangerous substances. For information on the types  
in question please contact your nearest Infineon  
Technologies office.  
© 2022 Infineon Technologies AG.  
All Rights Reserved.  
Do you have a question about any  
aspect of this document?  
Email: erratum@infineon.com  
Except as otherwise explicitly approved by Infineon  
Technologies in  
authorized representatives of Infineon Technologies,  
Infineon Technologies’ products may not be used in  
any applications where a failure of the product or any  
consequences of the use thereof can reasonably be  
expected to result in personal injury.  
a written document signed by  
Document reference  
Z8F68447746  

相关型号:

TLE9262QX

The device is designed for various CAN-LIN automotive applications as main supply for the microcontroller and as interface for a LIN and CAN bus network.
INFINEON

TLE9263-3BQX

The device is designed for various CAN-LIN automot
INFINEON

TLE9263-3BQX V33

The device is designed for various CAN-LIN automot
INFINEON

TLE9263BQX

The device is designed for various CAN-LIN automot
INFINEON

TLE9263QX

The device is designed for various CAN-LIN automotive applications as main supply for the microcontroller and as interface for a LIN and CAN bus network.
INFINEON

TLE9271QX

The device is designed for various CAN-LIN automotive applications as the main supply forthe microcontroller and as the interface for LIN and CAN bus networks.
INFINEON

TLE9271QX V33

The device is designed forvarious CAN-LIN automotive applications as the main supply for the microcontroller and as the interface for LIN and CAN bus networks.
INFINEON

TLE9272QX

The device is designed forvarious CAN-LIN automotive applications as the main supply forthe microcontroller and as the Interface for LIN and CAN bus networks.
INFINEON

TLE9274QX

The device is designed for various CAN-LIN automotive applications as the main supply forthe microcontroller and as the Interface for LIN and CAN bus networks.
INFINEON

TLE9274QX V33

The device is designed forvarious CAN-LIN automotive applications as the main supply forthe microcontroller and as the interface for LIN and CAN bus networks.
INFINEON

TLE9278-3BQX

A high-efficient switch mode power supply (SMPS) buck regulator provides an external 5.0 V output voltage at up to 750 mA, while an additional DC/DC boost converter supports applications or conditions at low input supply voltages. The device is controlled and monitored via a 16-bit serial peripheral interface (SPI). Additional features include a time-out/window watchdog circuit with reset, fail output and undervoltage reset. The device offers low-power modes in order to support applications that are connected permanently to the battery. A wake-up from the low-power mode is possible via LIN/CAN bus, via the bi-level sensitive monitoring/wake-up input as well as via the timer. The TLE9278-3BQX is offered in a very small footprint, exposed pad PG-VQFN-48 (7 x 7 mm2) power package.
INFINEON

TLE9278-3BQX V33

A high-efficient switch mode power supply (SMPS) buck regulator provides an external 3.3 V output voltage at up to 750 mA, while an additional DC/DC boost converter supports applications or conditions at low input supply voltages. The device is controlled and monitored via a 16-bit serial peripheral interface (SPI). Additional features include a time-out/window watchdog circuit with reset, fail output and undervoltage reset. The device offers low-power modes in order to support applications that are connected permanently to the battery. A wake-up from the low-power mode is possible via LIN/CAN bus, via the bi-level sensitive monitoring/wake-up input as well as via the timer. The TLE9278-3BQX V33 is offered in a very small footprint, exposed pad PG-VQFN-48 (7 x 7 mm2) power package.
INFINEON